Netgear Prosafe 24 Port Gigabitstackable Smart Switch Gs724Ts 100Nas Users Manual GS108T And GS110TP Software Administration

GS724TS-100NAS to the manual 81cf5c6d-7271-4214-b5f7-6314e97aeeb3

2015-01-24

: Netgear Netgear-Prosafe-24-Port-Gigabitstackable-Smart-Switch-Gs724Ts-100Nas-Users-Manual-332340 netgear-prosafe-24-port-gigabitstackable-smart-switch-gs724ts-100nas-users-manual-332340 netgear pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 275 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

February 2012
202-10484-04
v1.0
350 East Plumeria Drive
San Jose, CA 95134
USA
GS716T and GS724T Smart
Switches
Software Administration Manual
2 |
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
©2012 NETGEAR, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated
into any language in any form or by any means without the written permission of NETGEAR, Inc.
Technical Support
Thank you for choosing NETGEAR. To register your product, get the latest product updates, or get support online,
visit us at http://support.netgear.com.
Phone (US & Canada only): 1-888-NETGEAR
Phone (Other Countries): See Support information card.
Trademarks
NETGEAR, the NETGEAR logo, ReadyNAS, ProSafe, Smart Control Center, Auto Uplink, X-RAID2, and NeoTV
are trademarks or registered trademarks of NETGEAR, Inc. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and Vista are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brand and product names are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective holders.
Statement of Conditions
To improve internal design, operational function, and/or reliability, NETGEAR reserves the right to make changes
to the products described in this document without notice. NETGEAR does not assume any liability that may occur
due to the use, or application of, the product(s) or circuit layout(s) described herein.
Revision History
Publication Part Number Version Publish Date Comments
202-10484-04 v1.0 February 2012 Changed Appendix A:
Port Trunking specification
2 for GS716T, 4 for
GS724T
Table of Contents | 3
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started
Getting Started with the GS716T and GS724T Gigabit Smart Switches. . 10
Switch Management Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Connecting the Switch to the Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Switch Discovery in a Network with a DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Switch Discovery in a Network without a DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Configuring the Network Settings on the Administrative System . . . . . . . 16
Web Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Smart Control Center Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Network Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Configuration Upload and Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Firmware Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Viewing and Managing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Understanding the User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Interface Naming Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Chapter 2 Configuring System Information
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
IP Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Denial of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Green Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
SNMPV1/V2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Trap Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
SNMP v3 User Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
LLDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
LLDP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
LLDP Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
LLDP-MED Network Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
LLDP-MED Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Local Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Neighbors Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
4 | Table of Contents
Services — DHCP Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
DHCP Filtering Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Chapter 3 Configuring Switching Information
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Port Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Link Aggregation Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
LAG Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
LAG Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
LACP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
LACP Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
VLAN Membership Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Port VLAN ID Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Voice VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Voice VLAN Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Voice VLAN Port Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Voice VLAN OUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Auto-VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
STP Switch Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
CST Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
CST Port Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
CST Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Rapid STP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
MST Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
MST Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
STP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Auto-Video Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
IGMP Snooping Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Forwarding Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Dynamic Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Static MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Chapter 4 Configuring Quality of Service
Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Basic CoS Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
CoS Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Interface Queue Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
802.1p to Queue Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Table of Contents | 5
DSCP to Queue Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Differentiated Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Defining DiffServ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Diffserv Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Class Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Policy Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Service Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Chapter 5 Managing Device Security
Management Security Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
RADIUS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Configuring TACACS+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Authentication List Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Configuring Management Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
HTTP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Secure HTTP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Certificate Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Access Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Access Rule Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
802.1X Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Port Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Traffic Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
MAC Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
MAC Filter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Storm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Port Security Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Port Security Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Security MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Protected Ports Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Configuring Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
ACL Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
MAC ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
MAC Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
MAC Binding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
MAC Binding Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
IP Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
IP Extended Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
IP Binding Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
IP Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
6 | Table of Contents
Chapter 6 Monitoring the System
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Switch Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Port Detailed Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
EAP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
System Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Memory Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
FLASH Log Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Server Log Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Trap Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Event Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Multiple Port Mirroring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Chapter 7 Maintenance
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Device Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Upload File From Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Download File To Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
TFTP File Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
HTTP File Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Dual Image Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Dual Image Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Ping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Chapter 8 Help
Online Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Appendix A Hardware Specifications and Default Values
GS716T and GS724T Gigabit Smart Switches Specifications . . . . . . . . .244
GS716T Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
GS724T Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
GS716T and GS724T Switch Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
GS716T and GS724T Switch Features and Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Port Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Traffic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Quality Of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Table of Contents | 7
Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Appendix B Configuration Examples
Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
VLAN Example Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Access Control Lists (ACLs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
MAC ACL Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Standard IP ACL Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Differentiated Services (DiffServ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
DiffServ Traffic Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Creating Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
DiffServ Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
802.1X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
802.1X Example Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
MSTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
MSTP Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Appendix C Notification of Compliance
Index
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
8 | Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 9
1. Getting Started 1
The NETGEAR® GS716T and GS724T Smart Switch Software Administration Manual describes
how to configure and operate the GS716T and GS724T Gigabit Smart Switches by using the
Web-based graphical user interface (GUI). This manual describes the software configuration
procedures and explains the options available within those procedures.
Document Organization
The GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual contains the following
chapters:
• Chapter 1, Getting Started, contains information about performing the initial system
configuration and accessing the user interface.
• Chapter 2, Configuring System Information, describes how to configure administrative
features such as SNMP, DHCP, and port information.
• Chapter 3, Configuring Switching Information, describes how to manage and monitor the
layer 2 switching features.
• Chapter 4, Configuring Quality of Service, describes how to manage the Access Control
Lists (ACLs), and how to configure Differentiated Services and Class of Service features.
• Chapter 5, Managing Device Security, contains information about configuring switch
security information such as port access control and RADIUS server settings.
• Chapter 6, Monitoring the System, describes how to view a variety of information about
the switch and its ports, and to configure how the switch monitors events.
• Chapter 7, Maintenance, describes features to help you manage the switch.
• Chapter 8, Help, describes how to access Online Help resources for the switch.
• Appendix A, Hardware Specifications and Default Values, contains hardware
specifications and default values on the GS716T and GS724T Smart Switches.
• Appendix B, Configuration Examples, contains examples of how to configure various
features on the GS716T and GS724T Smart Switches, such as VLANs and ACLs.
Note: Refer to the release notes for the GS716T and GS724T Gigabit
Smart Switches for information about issues and workarounds.
10 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Getting Started with the GS716T and GS724T Gigabit
Smart Switches
This chapter provides an overview of starting your NETGEAR GS716T or GS724T Smart
Switch and accessing the user interface. It also leads you through the steps to use the Smart
Control Center utility. This chapter contains the following sections:
• Switch Management Interface on page 11
• Connecting the Switch to the Network on page 12
• Switch Discovery in a Network with a DHCP Server on page 13
• Switch Discovery in a Network without a DHCP Server on page 15
• Configuring the Network Settings on the Administrative System on page 16
• Web Access on page 18
• Smart Control Center Utilities on page 19
• Understanding the User Interfaces on page 24
• Interface Naming Convention on page 29
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 11
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Switch Management Interface
The NETGEAR GS716T and GS724T Smart Switches contain embedded Web server and
management software for managing and monitoring switch functions. The switches function
as a simple switch without the management software. However, you can use the
management software to configure more advanced features that can improve switch
efficiency and overall network performance.
Web-based management lets you monitor, configure, and control your switch remotely using
a standard Web browser instead of using expensive and complicated SNMP software
products. From your Web browser, you can monitor the performance of your switch and
optimize its configuration for your network. You can configure all switch features, such as
VLANs, QoS, and ACLs by using the Web-based management interface.
NETGEAR provides the Smart Control Center utility with this product. This program runs
under Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows 2000, or Windows Vista® and provides a front end
that discovers the switches on your network segment (L2 broadcast domain). When you
power up your switch for the first time, use the Smart Control Center to discover the switch
and view the network information that has been automatically assigned to the switch by a
DHCP server; or, if no DHCP server is present on the network, use the Smart Control Center
to discover the switch and assign static network information.
In addition to enabling NETGEAR switch discovery, the Smart Control Center provides
several utilities to help you maintain the NETGEAR switches on your network, such as
password management, firmware upgrade, and configuration file backup. For more
information, see Smart Control Center Utilities on page 19.
12 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Connecting the Switch to the Network
To enable remote management of the switch through a Web browser or SNMP, you must
connect the switch to the network and configure it with network information (an IP address,
subnet mask, and default gateway). The switch has a default IP address of 192.168.0.239
and a default subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
Use one of the following three methods to change the default network information on the
switch:
• Dynamic assignment through DHCP—DHCP is enabled by default on the switch. If you
connect the switch to a network with a DHCP server, the switch obtains its network
information automatically. You can use the Smart Control Center to discover the
automatically-assigned network information. For more information, see Switch Discovery
in a Network with a DHCP Server on page 13
• Static assignment through the Smart Control Center—If you connect the switch to a
network that does not have a DHCP server, you can use the Smart Control Center to
assign a static IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. For more information, see
Switch Discovery in a Network without a DHCP Server on page 15
• Static assignment by connecting from a local host—If you do not want to use the Smart
Control Center to assign a static address, you can connect to the switch from a host
(administrative system) in the 192.168.0.0/24 network and change the settings by using
the Web-based management interface on the switch. For information about how to set the
IP address on the administrative system so it is in the same subnet as the default IP
address of the switch, see Configuring the Network Settings on the Administrative
System on page 16.
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 13
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Switch Discovery in a Network with a DHCP Server
This section describes how to set up your switch in a network that has a DHCP server. The
DHCP client on the switch is enabled by default. When you connect it to your network, the
DHCP server will automatically assign an IP address to your switch. Use the Smart Control
Center to discover the IP address automatically assigned to the switch.
To install the switch in a network with a DHCP server, use the following steps:
1. Connect the switch to a network with a DHCP server.
2. Power on the switch by connecting its AC-DC power adapter.
3. Install the Smart Control Center on your computer.
4. Start the Smart Control Center.
5. Click Discover for the Smart Control Center to find your switch. You should see a screen
similar to the one shown in the following figure.
y
6. Make a note of the displayed IP address assigned by the DHCP server. You will need this
value to access the switch directly from a Web browser (without using the Smart Control
Center).
7. Select your switch by clicking the line that displays the switch, then click the
Web Browser Access button. The Smart Control Center displays a login window similar to
the following figure.
14 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Use your Web browser to manage your switch. The default password is password. Then
use this page to proceed to management of the switch covered in Using the Web
Interface on page 24.
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 15
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Switch Discovery in a Network without a DHCP Server
This section describes how to use the Smart Control Center to set up your switch in a
network without a DHCP server. If your network has no DHCP service, you must assign a
static IP address to your switch. If you choose, you can assign it a static IP address, even if
your network has DHCP service.
To assign a static IP address:
1. Connect the switch to your existing network.
2. Power on the switch by plugging in the AC-DC power adapter.
3. Install the Smart Control Center on your computer.
4. Start the Smart Control Center.
5. Click Discover for the Smart Control Center to find your GS716T and GS724T switch. The
utility broadcasts Layer 2 discovery packets within the broadcast domain to discover the
switch. You should see a screen similar to Figure on page 13.
6. Select the switch, then click Configure Device. The page expands to display additional
fields at the bottom of the page, as the following figure shows.
.
7. Choose the Disabled radio button to disable DHCP.
8. Enter the static switch IP address, gateway IP address, and subnet mask for the switch, and
then type your password.
Tip: You must enter the current password every time you use the Smart
Control Center to update the switch setting. The default password is
password.
16 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
9. Click Apply to configure the switch with the network settings.
Please ensure that your PC and the switch are in the same subnet. Make a note of these
settings for later use.
Configuring the Network Settings on the Administrative
System
If you choose not to use the Smart Control Center to configure the network information on the
switch, you can connect directly to the switch from an administrative system, such as a PC or
laptop computer. The IP address of the administrative system must be in the same subnet as
the default IP address on the switch. For most networks, this means you must change the IP
address of the administrative system to be on the same subnet as the default IP address of
the switch (192.168.0.239).
To change the IP address on an administrative system running a Microsoft® Windows®
operating system, open the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) properties screen that you access
from the Local Area Connection properties, as shown in the following figure. You need
Windows Administrator privileges to change these settings.
WARNING!
When you change the IP address of your administrative system,
you will loose your connection to the rest of the network. Be sure
to write down your current network address settings before you
change them.
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 17
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To modify the network settings on your administrative system:
1. On your PC, access the MS Windows operating system TCP/IP Properties.
2. Set the IP address of the administrative system to an address in the 192.168.0.0 network,
such as 192.168.0.200. The IP address must be different from that of the switch but within
the same subnet.
3. Click OK.
To configure a static address on the switch:
1. Use a straight-through cable to connect the Ethernet port on the administrative system
directly to any port on the GS716T and GS724T.
2. Open a Web browser on your PC and connect to the management interface as described in
Web Access on page 18.
3. Change the network settings on the switch to match those of your network (this procedure is
described in IP Configuration on page 33).
After you change the network settings on the switch, return the network configuration on your
administrative system to the original settings.
18 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Web Access
To access the GS716T or GS724T management interface, use one of the following methods:
• From the Smart Control Center, select the switch and click Web Browser Access.
• Open a Web browser and enter the IP address of the switch in the address field.
You must be able to ping the IP address of the GS716T or GS724T management interface
from your administrative system for Web access to be available. If you used the Smart
Control Center to set up the IP address and subnet mask, either with or without a DHCP
server, use that IP address in the address field of your Web browser. If you did not change
the IP address of the switch from the default value, enter 192.168.0.239 into the address
field.
Clicking Web Browser Access on the Smart Control Center or accessing the switch directly
from your Web browser displays the login screen shown in the following figure.
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 19
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Smart Control Center Utilities
In addition to device discovery and network address assignment, the Smart Control Center
includes several maintenance features. This section describes the following Smart Control
Center utilities:
• Network Utilities on page 19
• Configuration Upload and Download on page 19
• Firmware Upgrade on page 21
Network Utilities
From the Network tab, you can perform the following functions:
• DHCP Refresh—Forces the switch to release the current bindings and request new
address information from the DHCP server.
• Reboot Device—Reboots the selected device.
• Web Browser Access—Launches a Web browser and connects to the management
interface for the selected device.
• Configure Device—Allows you to change network information for the switch such as the
IP address, and DHCP client mode.
• Change Password—Allows you to set a new password for the device. In this process,
you are required to enter the old password and to confirm the new one, which can contain
up to 20 ASCII characters.
From the Maintenance tab, you can upload or download a switch configuration file and
upgrade the switch firmware.
Configuration Upload and Download
When you make changes to the switch, the configuration information is stored in a file on the
switch. You can backup the configuration by uploading the configuration file from the switch
to an administrative system. You can download a saved configuration file from the
administrative system to the switch. The configuration file you download to the switch
overwrites the running configuration on the switch.
Configuration upload and download is useful if you want to save a copy of the current switch
configuration (Upload Configuration) before you make changes. If you do not like the
changes, you can use the Download Configuration option to restore the switch to the settings
in the saved configuration file.
To save a copy of the current switch configuration on your administrative system:
1. Click the Maintenance tab and select the device with the configuration to save.
2. Click Upload Configuration.
3. From the Browse for Folder window that appears, navigate to and select the folder where
you want to store the configuration file.
20 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
4. Click OK.
5. Enter the switch password and click Apply.
The file is uploaded to the administrative computer as a *.cfg file. You can open it and
view the contents with a text editor.
To restore the configuration to a previously saved version:
1. Click the Maintenance tab and select the device with the configuration to restore.
2. Click Download Configuration.
3. From the Select a Configuration window that appears, navigate to and select the
configuration file to download to the switch.
4. Click Open.
5. Enter the switch password and click Apply to begin the download process.
Note: Click the Tasks tab to view status information about the
configuration download.
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 21
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Firmware Upgrade
The application software for the GS716T and GS724T Smart Switches is upgradeable,
enabling your switch to take advantage of improvements and additional features as they
become available. The upgrade procedure and the required equipment are described in this
section. This procedure assumes that you have downloaded or otherwise obtained the
firmware upgrade and that you have it available as a binary file on your computer. This
procedure uses the TFTP protocol to implement the transfer from computer to switch.
Note: You can also upgrade the firmware using the TFTP Download and
HTTP Download features mentioned in this book.
To upgrade your firmware:
1. Click the Maintenance tab, and then click the Firmware link directly below the tabs
(see Figure on page 13).
2. Select the switch to upgrade and click Download Firmware.
By default, the firmware is downloaded to primary storage and will be become the active
image after the download completes and the switch reboots. To download firmware to use
as a backup image, select the Secondary Storage option. To prevent the switch from
using the downloaded firmware as the active image, make sure the Run this FW after
download option is clear.
3. From the Select new firmware window that appears, navigate to and select the firmware
image to download to the switch.
4. Click Open.
You can choose to schedule a later time to complete the download and installation by
clearing the Run Now? option and selecting a date and time to perform the firmware
download and installation. The scheduled firmware download appears in the Tasks list.
5. Enter the switch password to continue downloading the firmware.
6. Click Apply to download the firmware and upgrade the switch with the new image.
22 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
7. When the process is complete, the switch automatically reboots.
Note: Click the Tasks tab to view status information about the firmware
upgrade.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not power-off the administrative system
or the switch while the firmware upgrade is in progress.
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 23
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Viewing and Managing Tasks
From the Tasks tab, you can view information about configuration downloads and firmware
upgrades that have already occurred, are in progress, or are scheduled to take place at a
later time. You can also delete or reschedule selected tasks. The following figure shows the
Tasks page.
The following list describes the command buttons that are specific to the Tasks page:
• Delete Task—Remove a completed or schedule task from the list.
• Reschedule—Change the scheduled date and time for a pending firmware upgrade.
• Select Range—Select all tasks that occurred or are scheduled to occur within a certain
period of time.
24 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Understanding the User Interfaces
The switch software includes a set of comprehensive management functions for configuring
and monitoring the system by using one of the following methods:
• Web user interface
• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Each of the standards-based management methods allows you to configure and monitor the
components of the switch software. The method you use to manage the system depends on
your network size and requirements, and on your preference.
This manual describes how to use the Web-based interface to manage and monitor the
system.
Using the Web Interface
To access the switch by using a Web browser, the browser must meet the following software
requirements:
• HTML version 4.0, or later
• HTTP version 1.1, or later
• Java Runtime Environment 1.6 or later
Use the following procedures to log on to the Web interface:
1. Open a Web browser and enter the IP address of the switch in the Web browser
address field.
2. The factory default password is password. Type the password into the field on the login
screen, and then click Login. Passwords are case sensitive.
3. After the system authenticates you, the System Information page displays.
Figure 1 on page 25 shows the layout of the Smart Switch Web interface.
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 25
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Figure 1. Administrative Page Layout
Navigation Tabs, Feature Links, and Page Menu
The navigation tabs along the top of the Web interface give you quick access to the various
switch functions. The tabs are always available and remain constant, regardless of which
feature you configure.
When you select a tab, the features for that tab appear as links directly under the tabs. The
feature links in the blue bar change according to the navigation tab that is selected.
The configuration pages for each feature are available as links in the page menu on the left
side of the page. Some items in the menu expand to reveal multiple configuration pages, as
Figure 2 on page 25. shows. When you click a menu item that includes multiple configuration
pages, the item becomes preceded by a down arrow symbol and expands to display the
additional pages.
Figure 2. Menu Hierarchy
26 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Configuration and Status Options
The area directly under the feature links and to the right of the page menu displays the
configuration information or status for the page you select. On pages that contain
configuration options, you can input information into fields or select options from drop-down
menus.
Each page contains access to the HTML-based help that explains the fields and configuration
options for the page. Each page also contains command buttons.
The following table shows the command buttons that are used throughout the pages in the
Web interface:
Device View
The Device View is a Java® applet that displays the ports on the switch. This graphic
provides an alternate way to navigate to configuration and monitoring options. The graphic
also provides information about device ports, current configuration and status, table
information, and feature components.
The Device View is available from the System Device View page.
The port coloring indicates whether a port is currently active. Green indicates that the port is
enabled, red indicates that an error has occurred on the port, or red indicates that the link is
disabled.
The following image shows the Device View of the GS716T and GS724T.
Click the port you want to view or configure to see a menu that displays statistics and
configuration options. Click the menu option to access the page that contains the
configuration or monitoring options.
Button Function
Add Clicking Add adds the new item configured in the heading row of a table.
Apply Clicking the Apply button sends the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration
changes take effect immediately.
Cancel Clicking Cancel cancels the configuration on the screen and resets the data on the screen
to the latest value of the switch.
Delete Clicking Delete removes the selected item.
Refresh Clicking the Refresh button refreshes the page with the latest information from the device.
Logout Clicking the Logout button ends the session.
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 27
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
If you click the graphic, but do not click a specific port, the main menu appears, as the
following figure shows. This menu contains the same option as the navigation tabs at the top
of the page.
28 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Help Page Access
Every page contains a link to the online help , which contains information to assist in
configuring and managing the switch. The online help pages are context sensitive. For
example, if the IP Addressing page is open, the help topic for that page displays if you click
Help. Figure 1 shows the location of the Help link on the Web interface.
User-Defined Fields
User-defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters, unless otherwise noted on the
configuration Web page. All characters may be used except for the following (unless
specifically noted in for that feature):
Using SNMP
The switch software supports the configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage
traps that the SNMP agent generates.
switch switches use both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private MIBs
that support additional switch functionality. All private MIBs begin with a “-” prefix. The main
object for interface configuration is in -SWITCHING-MIB, which is a private MIB. Some
interface configurations also involve objects in the public MIB, IF-MIB.
SNMP is enabled by default. The System Management System Information Web page,
which is the page that displays after a successful login, displays the information you need to
configure an SNMP manager to access the switch.
Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMPv3 protocol, but for authentication and
encryption, the switch supports only one user which is admin; therefore there is only one
profile that can be created or modified.
To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMPv3 admin profile by using
the Web interface:
1. Navigate to the System SNMP SNMPv3 User Configuration page.
2. To enable authentication, select an Authentication Protocol option, which is either MD5 or
SHA.
3. To enable encryption, select the DES option in the Encryption Protocol field. Then, enter
an encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric characters in the Encryption Key field.
4. Click Apply.
To access configuration information for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2, click System SNMP
SNMPv1/v2 and click the page that contains the information to configure.
\<
/>|
*|
?
Chapter 1: Getting Started | 29
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Interface Naming Convention
The switch supports physical and logical interfaces. Interfaces are identified by their type and
the interface number. The physical ports are gigabit interfaces and are numbered on the front
panel. You configure the logical interfaces by using the software. The following table
describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch.
Interface Description Example
Physical The physical ports are gigabit Ethernet interfaces and
are numbered sequentially starting from one.
g1, g2, g3
Link Aggregation Group (LAG) LAG interfaces are logical interfaces that are only
used for bridging functions.
l1, l2, l3
LAG1, LAG2
CPU Management Interface This is the internal switch interface responsible for the
switch base MAC address. This interface is not
configurable and is always listed in the MAC Address
Table.
c1
30 | Chapter 1: Getting Started
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 31
2. Configuring System Information 2
Use the features in the System tab to define the switch’s relationship to its environment. The
System tab contains links to the following features:
• Management on page 32
• License Key on page 47
• SNMP on page 47
• LLDP on page 52
• Services — DHCP Filtering on page 65
32 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Management
This section describes how to display the switch status and specify some basic switch
information, such as the management interface IP address, system clock settings, and DNS
information. From the Management link, you can access the following pages:
• System Information on page 32
• IP Configuration on page 33
• Time on page 35
• Denial of Service on page 41
• DNS on page 43
• Green Ethernet Configuration on page 46
System Information
After a successful login, the System Information page displays. Use this page to configure
and view general device information.
To display the System Information page, click System Management System Information.
A screen similar to the following displays.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 33
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To define system information:
1. Open the System Information page.
2. Define the following fields:
• System Name. Enter the name you want to use to identify this switch. You may use
up to 31 alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.
• System Location. Enter the location of this switch. You may use up to 31
alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.
• System Contact. Enter the contact person for this switch. You may use up to 31
alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.
3. Click Apply.
The system parameters are applied, and the device is updated.
The following table describes the status information the System Page displays.
IP Configuration
Use the IP Configuration page to configure network information for the management
interface, which is the logical interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch through
any of the switch's front panel ports. The configuration parameters associated with the
switch's network interface do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through
which traffic is switched or routed.
To access the page, click System Management IP Configuration. A screen similar to the
following displays.
Field Description
Serial Number The serial number of the switch.
System Object ID The base object ID for the switch's enterprise MIB.
Date & Time The current date and time.
System Up Time Displays the number of days, hours, and minutes since the last system
restart.
Base MAC Address The universally assigned network address.
Model Name The model name of the switch.
Boot Version The boot code version of the switch.
Software Version The software version of the switch.
34 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure the network information for the management interface:
1. Select the appropriate radio button to determine how to configure the network
information for the switch management interface:
• Dynamic IP Address (DHCP). Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address
through a DHCP server.
• Dynamic IP Address (BOOTP). Specifies that the switch must obtain the IP address
through a BootP server.
• Static IP Address. Specifies that the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
must be manually configured. Enter this information in the fields below this radio
button.
2. If you selected the Static IP Address option, configure the following network information:
• IP Address. The IP address of the network interface. The factory default value is
192.168.0.239. Each part of the IP address must start with a number other than zero.
For example, IP addresses 001.100.192.6 and 192.001.10.3 are not valid.
• Subnet Mask. The IP subnet mask for the interface. The factory default value is
255.255.255.0.
• Default Gateway. The default gateway for the IP interface. The factory default value
is 192.168.0.254.
3. Specify the VLAN ID for the management VLAN.
The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a
workstation that is connected to a port in the same VLAN. If not specified, the active
management VLAN ID is 1 (default), which allows an IP connection to be established
through any port.
When the management VLAN is set to a different value, an IP connection can be made
only through a port that is part of the management VLAN. It is also mandatory that the
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 35
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
port VLAN ID (PVID) of the port to be connected in that management VLAN be the same
as the management VLAN ID.
The management VLAN has the following requirements:
• Only one management VLAN can be active at a time.
• When a new management VLAN is configured, connectivity through the existing
management VLAN is lost.
• The management station should be reconnected to the port in the new management
VLAN.
Note: Make sure that the VLAN to be configured as the management
VLAN exists. And make sure that the PVID of at least one port that is
a port of the VLAN is the same as the management VLAN ID. For
information about creating VLANs and configuring the PVID for a
port, see VLANs on page 80.
4. If you change any of the network connection parameters, click Apply to apply the changes
to the system.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Time
switch software supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). You can also set the
system time manually
SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond.
Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. switch software operates only
as an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems.
Time sources are established by Stratums. Stratums define the accuracy of the reference
clock. The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. The
device receives time from stratum 1 and above since it is itself a stratum 2 device.
The following is an example of stratums:
• Stratum 0: A real-time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system.
• Stratum 1: A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. Stratum 1
time servers provide primary network time standards.
• Stratum 2: The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path.
For example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, via NTP, from a
Stratum 1 server.
Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and server
type.
36 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels:
• T1: Time at which the original request was sent by the client.
• T2: Time at which the original request was received by the server.
• T3: Time at which the server sent a reply.
• T4: Time at which the client received the server's reply.
The device can poll Unicast server types for the server time.
Polling for Unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known.
SNTP servers that have been configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for
synchronization information. T1 through T4 are used to determine server time. This is the
preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method. If this
method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the
device using the SNTP Server Configuration page.
The device retrieves synchronization information, either by actively requesting information or
at every poll interval.
Time Configuration
Use the Time Configuration page to view and adjust date and time settings.
To display the Time Configuration page, click System Management > Time SNTP Global
Configuration.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 37
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure the time by using the CPU clock cycle as the source:
1. From the Clock Source field, select Local.
2. In the Date field, enter the date in the DD/MM/YYYY format.
3. In the Time field, enter the time in HH:MM:SS format.
Note: If you do not enter a date and time, the switch will calculate the date
and time using the CPU’s clock cycle.
When the Clock Source is set to Local, the Time Zone field is grayed out (disabled):
4. Click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes occur
immediately.
To configure the time through SNTP:
1. From the Clock Source field, select SNTP.
When the Clock Source is set to SNTP, the Date and Time fields are grayed out
(disabled). The switch gets the date and time from the network.
38 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
2. Use the menu to select the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) time zone in which the switch
is located, expressed as the number of hours.
3. Click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes take
effect immediately.
4. Use the SNTP Server Configuration page to configure the SNTP server settings, as
described in SNTP Server Configuration on page 39.
5. Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
The SNTP Global Status table on the Time Configuration page displays information about
the system’s SNTP client. The following table describes the SNTP Global Status fields.
Field Description
Version Specifies the SNTP Version the client supports.
Supported Mode Specifies the SNTP modes the client supports. Multiple modes may be
supported by a client.
Last Update Time Specifies the local date and time (UTC) the SNTP client last updated the
system clock.
Last Attempt Time Specifies the local date and time (UTC) of the last SNTP request or receipt
of an unsolicited message.
Last Attempt Status Specifies the status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both
unicast mode. If no message has been received from a server, a status of
Other is displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes:
• Other: None of the following enumeration values.
• Success: The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was
updated.
• Request Timed Out: A directed SNTP request timed out without
receiving a response from the SNTP server.
• Bad Date Encoded: The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.
• Version Not Supported: The SNTP version supported by the server is
not compatible with the version supported by the client.
• Server Unsynchronized: The SNTP server is not synchronized with its
peers. This is indicated via the 'leap indicator' field on the SNTP
message.
• Server Kiss Of Death: The SNTP server indicated that no further
queries were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field
equal to 0 in a message received from a server.
Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the server for the last received valid packet. If no
message has been received from any server, an empty string is shown.
Address Type Specifies the address type of the SNTP Server address for the last received
valid packet.
Server Stratum Specifies the claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 39
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
SNTP Server Configuration
Use the SNTP Server Configuration page to view and modify information for adding and
modifying Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP servers.
To display the SNTP Server Configuration page, click System Management Time SNTP
Server Configuration.
To configure a new SNTP Server:
1. Enter the appropriate SNTP server information in the available fields:
• Server Type. Specifies whether the address for the SNTP server is an IP address
(IPv4) or hostname (DNS).
• Address. Enter the IP address or the hostname of the SNTP server.
• Port. Enter a port number on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent. The
valid range is 1–65535. The default is 123.
Reference Clock Id Specifies the reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid
packet.
Server Mode Specifies the mode of the server for the last received valid packet.
Unicast Sever Max Entries Specifies the maximum number of unicast server entries that can be
configured on this client.
Unicast Server Current
Entries
Specifies the number of current valid unicast server entries configured for
this client.
Field Description
40 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Priority . Specifies the priority of this server entry in determining the sequence of
servers to which SNTP requests are sent. Enter a priority from 1–3, with 1 being the
default and the highest priority. Servers with lowest numbers have priority.
• Version. Enter the protocol version number. The range is 1–4.
2. Click Add.
3. Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers. You can configure up to three
SNTP servers.
4. To removing an SNTP server, select the check box next to the configured server to remove,
and then click Delete. The entry is removed, and the device is updated.
5. To change the settings for an existing SNTP server, select the check box next to the
configured server and enter new values in the available fields, and then click Apply.
Configuration changes take effect immediately.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers
configured on your switch. The following table describes the SNTP Global Status fields.
Field Description
Address Specifies all the existing Server Addresses. If no Server configuration exists, a
message saying “No SNTP server exists” flashes on the screen.
Last Update Time Specifies the local date and time (UTC) that the response from this server was
used to update the system clock.
Last Attempt Time Specifies the local date and time (UTC) that this SNTP server was last queried.
Last Attempt Status Specifies the status of the last SNTP request to this server. If no packet has been
received from this server, a status of Other is displayed:
• Other: None of the following enumeration values.
• Success: The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was
updated.
• Request Timed Out: A directed SNTP request timed out without receiving a
response from the SNTP server.
• Bad Date Encoded: The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.
• Version Not Supported: The SNTP version supported by the server is not
compatible with the version supported by the client.
• Server Unsynchronized: The SNTP server is not synchronized with its
peers. This is indicated via the 'leap indicator' field on the SNTP message.
• Server Kiss Of Death: The SNTP server indicated that no further queries
were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in
a message received from a server.
Requests Specifies the number of SNTP requests made to this server since last agent
reboot.
Failed Requests Specifies the number of failed SNTP requests made to this server since last
reboot.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 41
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
Denial of Service
Use the Denial of Service (DoS) page to configure DoS control. The switch software provides
support for classifying and blocking specific types of DoS attacks. You can configure your
system to monitor and block six types of attacks:
• SIP=DIP: Source IP address = Destination IP address.
• First Fragment: TCP Header size is smaller than the configured value.
• TCP Fragment: IP Fragment Offset = 1.
• TCP Flag: TCP Flag SYN set and Source Port < 1024 or TCP Control Flags = 0 and TCP
Sequence Number = 0 or TCP Flags FIN, URG, and PSH set and TCP Sequence
Number = 0 or TCP Flags SYN and FIN set.
• L4 Port: Source TCP/UDP Port = Destination TCP/UDP Port.
• ICMP: Limiting the size of ICMP Ping packets.
Auto-DoS Configuration
The Auto-DoS Configuration page lets you automatically enable all the DoS features
available on the switch, except for the L4 Port attack. See the previous section for information
about the types of DoS attacks the switch can monitor and block.
Note: When Auto-DoS is enabled, a port that is under attack is
automatically shut down and does not forward traffic
To access the Auto-DoS Configuration page, click System Management Denial of
Service > Auto-DoS Configuration.
42 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure the Auto-DoS feature:
1. Select a radio button to enable or disable Auto-DoS:
• Disable. Auto-DoS is disabled (default).
• Enable. Auto-DoS is enabled.
2. Click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes occur
immediately.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
DoS Configuration
The DoS Configuration page lets you to select which types of DoS attacks for the switch to
monitor and block.
To access the DoS Configuration page, click System Management Denial of Service >
DoS Configuration.
To configure individual DoS settings:
1. Select the types of DoS attacks for the switch to monitor and block and configure any
associated values, as the following list describes.
• Denial of Service SIP=DIP. Enable or disable this option by selecting the appropriate
radio button. Enabling SIP=DIP DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets
that have a source IP address equal to the destination IP address. The factory default
is Disable.
• Denial of Service First Fragment. Enable or disable this option by selecting the
appropriate radio button. Enabling First Fragment DoS prevention causes the switch
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 43
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
to drop packets that have a TCP header smaller than the configured Min TCP Hdr
Size. The factory default is Disable.
• Denial of Service Min TCP Hdr Size. Specify the Min TCP Hdr Size allowed. If First
Fragment DoS prevention is enabled, the switch will drop packets that have a TCP
header smaller than this configured Min TCP Hdr Size. The factory default is 20
bytes.
• Denial of Service TCP Fragment. Enable or disable this option by selecting the
appropriate radio button. Enabling TCP Fragment DoS prevention causes the switch
to drop packets that have an IP fragment offset equal to 1. The factory default is
Disable.
• Denial of Service TCP Flag. Enable or disable this option by selecting the
appropriate radio button. Enabling TCP Flag DoS prevention causes the switch to
drop packets that have TCP flag SYN set and TCP source port less than 1024 or TCP
control flags set to 0 and TCP sequence number set to 0 or TCP flags FIN, URG, and
PSH set and TCP sequence number set to 0 or both TCP flags SYN and FIN set. The
factory default is Disable.
• Denial of Service L4 Port. Enable or disable this option by selecting the appropriate
radio button. Enabling L4 Port DoS prevention causes the switch to drop packets that
have TCP/UDP source port equal to TCP/UDP destination port. The factory default is
Disable.
• Denial of Service ICMP. Enable or disable this option by selecting the appropriate
radio button. Enabling ICMP DoS prevention causes the switch to drop ICMP packets
that have a type set to ECHO_REQ (ping) and a size greater than the configured
ICMP packet size. The factory default is Disable.
• Denial of Service Max ICMP Size. Specify the Max ICMP packet size allowed. If
ICMP DoS prevention is enabled, the switch will drop ICMP ping packets that have a
size greater then this configured Max ICMP packet size. The factory default is
Disable.
2. If you change any of the DoS settings, click Apply to apply the changes to the switch.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
DNS
You can use these pages to configure information about DNS servers the network uses and
how the switch operates as a DNS client.
DNS Configuration
Use this page to configure global DNS settings and DNS server information.
To access this page, click System Management DNS DNS Configuration.
44 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure the global DNS settings:
1. Specify whether to enable or disable the administrative status of the DNS Client.
• Enable. Allow the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS
domain name.
• Disable. Prevent the switch from sending DNS queries.
2. Enter the DNS default domain name to include in DNS queries. When the system is
performing a lookup on an unqualified hostname, this field is provided as the domain name
(for example, if default domain name is netgear.com and the user enters test, then test is
changed to test.netgear.com to resolve the name).
3. To specify the DNS server to which the switch sends DNS queries, enter an IP address in
standard IPv4 dot notation in the DNS Server Address and click Add. The server appears
in the list below. You can specify up to eight DNS servers. The precedence is set in the order
created.
4. To remove a DNS server from the list, select the check box next to the server you want to
remove and click Delete. If no DNS server is specified, the check box is global and will
delete all the DNS servers listed.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
6. Click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes take
effect immediately.
Host Configuration
Use this page to manually map host names to IP addresses or to view dynamic DNS
mappings.
To access this page, click System Management DNS Host Configuration.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 45
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To add a static entry to the local DNS table:
1. Specify the static host name to add. Enter up to 158 characters.
2. Specify the IP address in standard IPv4 dot notation to associate with the hostname.
3. Click Add. The entry appears in the list below.
4. To remove an entry from the static DNS table, select the check box next to the entry and
click Delete.
5. To change the hostname or IP address in an entry, select the check box next to the entry
and enter the new information in the appropriate field, and then click Apply.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
The Dynamic Host Configuration table shows host name-to-IP address entries that the switch
has learned. The following table describes the dynamic host fields:
Click Refresh to refresh the table with the most current data from the switch.
Click Clear to delete Dynamic Host Entries. The table will be repopulated with entries as they
are learned.
Field Description
Host Lists the host name you assign to the specified IP address.
Total Amount of time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table.
Elapsed Amount of time since the dynamic entry was last updated.
Type The type of the dynamic entry.
Addresses Lists the IP address associated with the host name.
46 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Green Ethernet Configuration
Use this page to configure Green Ethernet features. Using the Green Ethernet features
allows for power consumption savings.
To access this page, click System Management Green Ethernet Configuration.
To configure the Green Ethernet feature:
1. Enable or disable the Short Cable Mode.
• Enable. The switch performs a cable test on each cable connect to its ports. If the
cable is less than 10m in length, the port is placed in low power mode (nominal
power).
• Disable. Full transmit power is provided to all ports, regardless of cable length.
2. Click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes take
effect immediately.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 47
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
License Key
This page provides information about available License Keys for various features. By default
those License Keys are not available. If License Key for feature is not available, the user will
not be allowed to configure this functionality. Available License Key allows the user to
configure functionality.
Non Configurable Data
• License date - The date the license is purchased.
• License copy - The information about the number of license.
• License Status - Show whether License is Active/Inactive. "Inactive" means that user
should download a license file and reboot a system
• Description - Show status of License Key.
SNMP
From SNMP link under the System tab, you can configure SNMP settings for SNMP V1/V2
and SNMPv3.
From the SNMP link, you can access the following pages:
• SNMPV1/V2 on page 47
• Trap Flags on page 50
• SNMP v3 User Configuration on page 51
SNMPV1/V2
The pages under the SNMPV1/V2 menu allow you to configure SNMP community
information, traps, and trap flags.
48 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Community Configuration
To display this page, click System SNMP SNMP V1/V2 Community Configuration.
By default, two SNMP Communities exist:
• Private, with Read/Write privileges and status set to Enable.
• Public, with Read Only privileges and status set to Enable.
These are well-known communities. Use this page to change the defaults or to add other
communities. Only the communities that you define using this page will have access to the
switch using the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c protocols. Only those communities with read/write
level access can be used to change the configuration using SNMP.
Use this page when you are using the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c protocol.
To configure SNMP communities:
1. To add a new SNMP community, enter community information in the available fields
described below, and then click Add.
• Management Station IP. Specify the IP address of the management station.Together,
the Management Station IP and the Management Station IP Mask denote a range of
IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access this
device. If either (Management Station IP or Management Station IP Mask) value is
0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP address. Otherwise, every client’s address is
ANDed with the mask, as is the Management Station IP Address; and, if the values
are equal, access is allowed. For example, if the Management Station IP and
Management Station IP Mask parameters are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, then any
client whose address is 192.168.1.0 through 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) will be allowed
access. To allow access from only one station, use a Management Station IP Mask
value of 255.255.255.255, and use that machine’s IP address for Client Address.
• Management Station IP Mask. Specify the subnet mask to associate with the
management station IP address.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 49
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Community String. Specify a community name. A valid entry is a case-sensitive
string of up to 16 characters.
• Access Mode. Specify the access level for this community by selecting Read/Write or
Read Only from the menu.
• Status. Specify the status of this community by selecting Enable or Disable from the
pull down menu. If you select Enable, the Community Name must be unique among
all valid Community Names or the set request will be rejected. If you select Disable,
the Community Name will become invalid.
2. To modify an existing community, select the check box next to the community, change the
desired fields, and then click Apply. Configuration changes take effect immediately.
3. To delete a community, select the check box next to the community and click Delete.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Trap Configuration
This page displays an entry for every active Trap Receiver. To access this page, click System
SNMP SNMP V1/V2 Trap Configuration.
To configure SNMP trap settings:
1. To add a host that will receive SNMP traps, enter trap configuration information in the
available fields described below, and then click Add.
• Recipients IP. The address in x.x.x.x format to receive SNMP traps from this device.
• Version. The trap version to be used by the receiver from the menu.
• SNMP v1: Uses SNMP v1 to send traps to the receiver.
• SNMP v2: Uses SNMP v2 to send traps to the receiver.
• Community String. The community string for the SNMP trap packet to be sent to the
trap manager. This may be up to 16 characters and is case sensitive.
• Status. Select the receiver’s status from the menu:
• Enable: Send traps to the receiver.
• Disable: Do not send traps to the receiver.
50 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
2. To modify information about an existing SNMP recipient, select the check box next to the
recipient, change the desired fields, and then click Apply. Configuration changes take effect
immediately.
3. To delete a recipient, select the check box next to the recipient and click Delete.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Trap Flags
The pages in the Trap Manager folder allow you to view and configure information about
SNMP traps the system generates.
Use the Trap Flags page to enable or disable traps the switch can send to an SNMP
manager. When the condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch, a trap
message is sent to any enabled SNMP Trap Receivers, and a message is written to the trap
log.
To access the Trap Flags page, click System SNMP SNMP V1/V2 Trap Flags.
To configure the trap flags:
1. From the Authentication field, enable or disable activation of authentication failure
traps by selecting the corresponding button. The factory default is Enable.
2. From the Link Up/Down field, enable or disable activation of link status traps by selecting
the corresponding button. The factory default is Enable.
3. From the Spanning Tree field, enable or disable activation of spanning tree traps by
selecting the corresponding button. The factory default is Enable.
4. If you make any changes to this page, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 51
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
SNMP v3 User Configuration
This is the configuration for SNMP v3.
To access this page, click System SNMP SNMP V3 User Configuration.
The SNMPv3 Access Mode is a read-only field that shows the access privileges for the user
account. The admin account always has Read/Write access, and all other accounts have
Read Only access.
To configure SNMPv3 settings for the user account:
1. In the Authentication Protocol field, specify the SNMPv3 Authentication Protocol setting
for the selected user account. The valid Authentication Protocols are None, MD5, or
SHA. If you select:
• None: The user will be unable to access the SNMP data from an SNMP browser.
• MD5 or SHA: The user login password will be used as SNMPv3 authentication
password, and you must therefore specify a password. The password must be eight
characters in length.
2. In the Encryption Protocol field, choose whether to encrypt SNMPv3 packets transmitted by
the switch.
• None. Do not encrypt the contents of SNMPv3 packets transmitted from the switch.
• DES. Encrypt SNMPv3 packets using the DES encryption protocol.
3. If you selected DES in the Encryption Protocol field, enter the SNMPv3 Encryption Key here.
Otherwise, this field is ignored. Valid keys are 0 to 15 characters long.
4. Click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes take
effect immediately.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
52 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
LLDP
The IEEE 802.1AB-defined standard, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), allows stations
on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. This information is
viewed by a network manager to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on
the LAN.
From the LLDP link, you can access the following pages:
• LLDP Configuration on page 52
• LLDP Port Settings on page 53
• LLDP-MED Network Policy on page 55
• LLDP-MED Port Settings on page 56
• Local Information on page 57
• Neighbors Information on page 60
LLDP is a one-way protocol; there are no request/response sequences. Information is
advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by
stations implementing the receive function. The transmit and receive functions can be
enabled/disabled separately per port. By default, both transmit and receive are disabled on
all ports. The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine
appropriately, based on the configured status and operational state of the port.
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an
enhancement to LLDP with the following features:
• Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority, and DiffServ settings),
enabling plug and play networking.
• Device location discovery for creation of location databases.
• Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints.
• Inventory management, enabling network administrators to track their network devices
and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions,
serial/asset number).
LLDP Configuration
Use the LLDP Configuration page to specify LLDP and LLDP-MED parameters that are
applied to the switch.
To display the LLDP Configuration page, click System > LLDP > Basic > LLDP
Configuration.
Note: You can also access the LLDP Configuration page by clicking
System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP Configuration.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 53
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure global LLDP settings:
1. Configure the following LLDP properties.
• TLV Advertised Interval. Specify the interval at which frames are transmitted. The
default is 30 seconds, and the valid range is 1–32768 seconds.
• Hold Multiplier. Specify multiplier on the transmit interval to assign to Time-to-Live
(TTL). The default is 4 seconds, and the range is 2–10.
• Reinitializing Delay. Specify the delay before a reinitialization. The default is 2
seconds, and the range is 1–10 seconds.
• Transmit Delay. Specify the interval for the transmission of notifications. The default
is 5 seconds, and the range is 5–3600 seconds.
2. To change the LLDP-MED properties in the Fast Start Duration field, specify the number of
LLDP packets sent when the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is initialized, which occurs
when a new endpoint device links with the LLDP-MED network connectivity device. The
default value is 3 times, and the range is from 1–10.
3. Click Apply to apply the new settings to the system.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. Click Refresh to update the screen with the current information.
LLDP Port Settings
Use the LLDP Port Settings page to specify LLDP parameters that are applied to a specific
interface.
To display the LLDP Port Settings page, click System > LLDP > Advanced > LLDP Port
Settings.
54 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure LLDP port settings:
1. Change the LLDP port settings described below:
• Interface. Specifies the port to be affected by these parameters.
• Admin Status. Select the status for transmitting and receiving LLDP packets:
• Tx Only: Enable only transmitting LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.
• Rx Only: Enable only receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 55
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Tx and Rx: Enable both transmitting and receiving LLDP PDUs on the selected
ports.
• Disabled: Do not transmit or receive LLDP PDUs on the selected ports.
• Management IP Address. Choose whether to advertise the management IP address
from the interface. The possible field values are:
• Stop Advertise: Do not advertise the management IP address from the interface.
• Auto Advertise: Advertise the current IP address of the device as the
management IP address.
• Notification. When notifications are enabled, LLDP interacts with the Trap Manager to
notify subscribers of remote data change statistics. The default is Disabled.
• Optional TLV(s). Enable or disable the transmission of optional type-length value
(TLV) information from the interface. The TLV information includes the system name,
system description, system capabilities, and port description. To configure the System
Name, see Management on page 32. To configure the Port Description, see Ports on
page 70.
2. If you make any changes to the page, click Apply to apply the new settings to the system.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
LLDP-MED Network Policy
This page displays information about the LLPD-MED network policy TLV transmitted in the
LLDP frames on the selected local interface.
To display this page, click System LLDP Advanced LLDP-MED Network Policy.
From the Interface menu, select the interface with the information to view. The following
table describes the LLDP-MED network policy information that displays on the screen.
56 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
LLDP-MED Port Settings
Use this page to enable LLDP-MED mode on an interface and configure its properties.
To display this page, click System LLDP Advanced LLDP-MED Port Settings.
To configure LLDP-MED settings for a port:
1. From the Port field, select the port to configure.
2. From the LLDP-MED Status field, enable or disable the LLDP-MED mode for the selected
interface.
Field Description
Network Policy Number Specifies the policy number.
Application Specifies the media application type associated with the policy. Only the
Voice application type is supported. The application type that is received on
the interface has the VLAN ID, priority, DSCP, tagged bit status and
unknown bit status. This information is displayed only if a network policy TLV
has been transmitted.
VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID associated with the policy.
VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or
untagged.
User Priority Specifies the priority associated with the policy.
DSCP Specifies the DSCP associated with a particular policy type.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 57
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
3. From the Notification field, specify whether the port should send a topology change
notification if a device is connected or removed.
4. From the Transmit Optional TLVs field, specify whether the port should transmit optional
type length values (TLVs) in the LLDP PDU frames. If enabled, the following LLDP-MED
TLVs are transmitted:
• MED Capabilities
• Network Policy
• Location Identification
• Extended Power via MDI: PSE
• Extended Power via MDI: PD
• Inventory
5. Click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. These changes occur
immediately and the configuration will be saved.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Local Information
Use the LLDP Local Information page to view the data that each port advertises through
LLDP.
To display the LLDP Local Device Information page, click System > Advanced > LLDP >
Local Information.
58 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table describes the LLDP local information that displays for each port.
Field Description
Interface Select the interface with the information to display.
Port ID Subtype Identifies the type of data displayed in the Port ID field.
Port ID Identifies the physical address of the port.
Port Description Identifies the user-defined description of the port. To configure the Port
Description, see Ports on page 70.
Advertisement Displays the advertisement status of the port.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 59
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
To view additional details about a port, click the name of the port in the Interface column of
the Port Information table.
A popup window displays information for the selected port.
The following table describes the detailed local information that displays for the selected port.
Field Description
Managed Address
Address SubType Displays the type of address the management interface uses, such as an IPv4
address.
Address Displays the address used to manage the device.
Interface SubType Displays the port subtype.
Interface Number Displays the number that identifies the port.
MAC/PHY Details
Auto-Negotiation Supported Specifies whether the interface supports port-speed auto-negotiation. The
possible values are True or False.
60 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Neighbors Information
Use the LLDP Neighbors Information page to view the data that a specified interface has
received from other LLDP-enabled systems.
To display the LLDP Neighbors Information page, click System > LLDP > Advanced >
Neighbors Information.
Auto-Negotiation Enabled Displays the port speed auto-negotiation support status. The possible values
are True (enabled) or False (disabled).
Auto Negotiation Advertised
Capabilities
Displays the port speed auto-negotiation capabilities such as 1000BASE-T
half-duplex mode or 100BASE-TX full-duplex mode.
Operational MAU Type Displays the Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs
physical layer functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet
interface collision detection and bit injection into the network.
MED Details
Capabilities Supported Displays the MED capabilities enabled on the port.
Current Capabilities Displays the TLVs advertised by the port.
Device Class Network Connectivity indicates the device is a network connectivity device.
Network Policies
Application Type Specifies the media application type associated with the policy.
VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID associated with the policy.
VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.
User Priority Specifies the priority associated with the policy.
DSCP Specifies the DSCP associated with a particular policy type.
Field Description
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 61
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table describes the information that displays for all LLDP neighbors that have
been discovered.
Click Refresh to update the information on the screen with the most current data.
To view additional information about the remote device, click the link in the MSAP Entry field.
A popup window displays information for the selected port.
Field Description
MSAP Entry Displays the Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the
remote device.
Local Port Displays the interface on the local system that received LLDP information
from a remote system.
Chassis ID Subtype Identifies the type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote
system.
Chassis ID Identifies the remote 802 LAN device's chassis.
Port ID Subtype Identifies the type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.
Port ID Identifies the physical address of the port on the remote system from which
the data was sent.
System Name Identifies the system name associated with the remote device. If the field is
blank, the name might not be configured on the remote system.
62 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Field Description
Port Details
Local Port Displays the interface on the local system that received LLDP information
from a remote system.
MSAP Entry Displays the Media Service Access Point (MSAP) entry number for the
remote device.
Basic Details
Chassis ID Subtype Identifies the type of data displayed in the Chassis ID field on the remote
system.
Chassis ID Identifies the remote 802 LAN device's chassis.
Port ID Subtype Identifies the type of data displayed in the remote system’s Port ID field.
Port ID Identifies the physical address of the port on the remote system from which
the data was sent.
Port Description Identifies the user-defined description of the port.
System Name Identifies the system name associated with the remote device.
System Description Specifies the description of the selected port associated with the remote
system.
System Capabilities Specifies the system capabilities of the remote system.
Managed Addresses
Address SubType Specifies the type of the management address.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 63
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Address Specifies the advertised management address of the remote system.
Interface SubType Specifies the port subtype.
Interface Number Identifies the port on the remote device that sent the information.
MAC/PHY Details
Auto-Negotiation Supported Specifies whether the remote device supports port-speed auto-negotiation.
The possible values are True or False
Auto-Negotiation Enabled Displays the port speed auto-negotiation support status. The possible values
are True or False
Auto Negotiation Advertised
Capabilities
Displays the port speed auto-negotiation capabilities.
Operational MAU Type Displays the Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) type. The MAU performs
physical layer functions, including digital data conversion from the Ethernet
interface collision detection and bit injection into the network.
MED Details
Capabilities Supported Specifies the supported capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the
device.
Current Capabilities Specifies the advertised capabilities that were received in MED TLV from the
device.
Device Class Displays the LLDP-MED endpoint device class. The possible device classes
are:
• Endpoint Class 1 Indicates a generic endpoint class, offering basic LLDP
services.
• Endpoint Class 2 Indicates a media endpoint class, offering media
streaming capabilities as well as all Class 1 features.
• Endpoint Class 3 Indicates a communications device class, offering all
Class 1 and Class 2 features plus location, 911, Layer 2 switch support
and device information management capabilities.
PoE Device Type Displays the port PoE type. For example, Powered.
PoE Power Source Displays the port's power source.
PoE Power Priority Displays the port's power priority.
PoE Power Value Displays the port's power value.
Hardware Revision Displays the hardware version advertised by the remote device.
Firmware Revision Displays the firmware version advertised by the remote device.
Software Revision Displays the software version advertised by the remote device.
Serial Number Displays the serial number advertised by the remote device.
Model Name Displays the model name advertised by the remote device.
Field Description
64 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Asset ID Displays the asset ID advertised by the remote device.
Location Information
Civic Displays the physical location, such as the street address, the remote device
has advertised in the location TLV. For example, 123 45th St. E. The field
value length range is 6–160 characters.
Coordinates Displays the location map coordinates the remote device has advertised in
the location TLV, including latitude, longitude and altitude.
ECS ELIN Displays the Emergency Call Service (ECS) Emergency Location
Identification Number (ELIN) the remote device has advertised in the location
TLV. The field range is 10–25.
Unknown Displays unknown location information for the remote device.
Network Policies
Application Type Specifies the media application type associated with the policy advertised by
the remote device.
VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID associated with the policy.
VLAN Type Specifies whether the VLAN associated with the policy is tagged or untagged.
User Priority Specifies the priority associated with the policy.
DSCP Specifies the DSCP associated with a particular policy type.
LLDP Unknown TLVs
Type Displays the unknown TLV type field.
Value Displays the unknown TLV value field.
Field Description
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 65
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Services — DHCP Filtering
DHCP Filtering is a useful feature that can be employed as a security measure against
unauthorized DHCP servers. A known attack is when an unauthorized DHCP server
responds to a client that is requesting an IP address. The server configures the gateway for
the client to be equal to the IP address of the server. At that point, the client sends all of its IP
traffic destined to other networks to the unauthorized machine. This gives the attacker the
possibility of snooping traffic for passwords or employing a man-in-the-middle attack. DHCP
Filtering works by allowing the administrator to configure each port as either a trusted port or
an untrusted port. The port that has the authorized DHCP server should be configured as a
trusted port. Any DHCP responses received on a trusted port are forwarded. All other ports
should be configured as untrusted. Any DHCP (or BootP) responses received are discarded.
From the Services link, you can access the following pages:
• DHCP Filtering Configuration on page 65
• Interface Configuration on page 66
DHCP Filtering Configuration
Use the DHCP Filtering Configuration page to enable or disable the DHCP Filtering feature
on the switch.
To access the DHCP Filter Configuration page, click System Services DHCP Filtering
Configuration.
To configure global DHCP filtering settings:
1. In the Admin Mode field, select Enable or Disable to turn the DHCP Filtering feature on
or off.
2. Click Apply to apply the change to the system. Configuration changes take effect
immediately.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
66 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Interface Configuration
Use the DHCP Filtering Interface Configuration page to view and configure each port as a
trusted or untrusted port. Any DHCP responses received on a trusted port are forwarded. If a
port is configured as untrusted, any DHCP (or BootP) responses received on that port are
discarded.
To access the DHCP Filtering Interface Configuration page, click System Services DHCP
Filtering Interface Configuration.
To configure DHCP filtering settings for an interface:
1. To configure DHCP filtering settings for a physical port, click PORTS.
2. To configure DHCP filtering settings for a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), click LAGS.
Chapter 2: Configuring System Information | 67
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
3. To configure DHCP filtering settings for both physical ports and LAGs, click ALL.
4. Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure. You can select multiple ports and
LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces. Select the check box in the
heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces.
5. Choose the trust mode for the selected port(s) or LAG(s).
• Enable: Any DHCP responses received on this port are forwarded.
• Disable: Any DHCP (or BootP) responses received on this port are discarded.
6. Click Apply to apply the change to the system. Configuration changes take effect
immediately.
7. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
68 | Chapter 2: Configuring System Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 69
3. Configuring Switching Information 3
Use the features in the Switching tab to define Layer 2 features. The Switching tab contains
links to the following features:
• Ports on page 70
• Link Aggregation Groups on page 74
• VLANs on page 80
• Voice VLAN on page 86
• Auto-VoIP on page 90
• Spanning Tree Protocol on page 93
• Multicast on page 109
• Forwarding Database on page 122
70 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Ports
The pages on the Ports tab allow you to view and monitor the physical port information for the
ports available on the switch. From the Ports link, you can access the following pages:
• Port Configuration on page 70
• Flow Control on page 73
Port Configuration
Use the Port Configuration page to configure the physical interfaces on the switch.
To access the Port Configuration page, click Switching Ports Port Configuration.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 71
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure port settings:
1. To configure settings for a physical port, click PORTS.
2. To configure settings for a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), click LAGS.
72 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
3. To configure settings for both physical ports and LAGs, click ALL.
4. Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure. You can select multiple ports and
LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces. Select the check box in the
heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces.
5. Configure or view the settings:
• Description. Enter the description string to be attached to a port. The string can be
up to 64 characters in length.
• Port Type. For most ports this field is blank. Otherwise, the possible values are:
• MON: Indicates that the port is a monitoring port. For additional information about
port monitoring see Port Mirroring on page 222.
• LAG: Indicates that the port is a member of a Link Aggregation trunk. For more
information see Link Aggregation Groups on page 74.
• Admin Mode. Use the menu to select the port control administration state, which can
be one of the following:
• Enable: The port can participate in the network (default).
• Disable: The port is administratively down and does not participate in the network.
• Port Speed. Use the menu to select the port’s speed and duplex mode. If you select
Auto, the duplex mode and speed will be set by the auto-negotiation process. The
port’s maximum capability (full duplex and 1000 Mbps) will be advertised. Otherwise,
your selection will determine the port’s duplex mode and transmission rate. The
factory default is Auto.
• Auto Power-Down Mode. Use the menu to select the port’s Green Ethernet mode,
which can be one of the following:
• Enable: Specifies that if no link partner is present, the port can go down for short
periods of time to reduce overall power consumption. The port wakes up
periodically to check for link pulses.
• Disable: The port does not participate in Green Ethernet mode and provides full
power to the port even if there is no link partner.
• Physical Status. Indicates the physical port’s speed and duplex mode
• Link Status. Indicates whether the Link is up or down.
• Link Trap. This object determines whether or not to send a trap when link status
changes. The factory default is Enable.
• Enable: Specifies that the system sends a trap when the link status changes.
• Disable: Specifies that the system does not send a trap when the link status
changes.
• MAC Address. Displays the physical address of the specified interface.
• PortList Bit Offset. Displays the bit offset value which corresponds to the port when
the MIB object type PortList is used to manage in SNMP.
• ifIndex. The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port. If the
interface field is set to All, this field is blank.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 73
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
7. If you make any changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
Flow Control
IEEE 802.3x flow control works by pausing a port when the port becomes oversubscribed
and dropping all traffic for small bursts of time during the congestion condition. This can lead
to high-priority and/or network control traffic loss. When IEEE 802.3x flow control is enabled,
lower speed switches can communicate with higher speed switches by requesting that the
higher speed switch refrains from sending packets. Transmissions are temporarily halted to
prevent buffer overflows.
To display the Flow Control page, click Switching Ports, and then click the Flow Control
link.
To configure global flow control settings:
1. From the Global Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) Mode field, enable or disable IEEE 802.3x
flow control on the system. The factory default is Disable.
• Enable. The switch sends pause packets if the port buffers become full.
• Disable. The switch does not send pause packets if the port buffers become full.
2. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
3. If you change the mode, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
74 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Link Aggregation Groups
Link aggregation groups (LAGs), which are also known as port-channels, allow you to
combine multiple full-duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the
aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load
sharing. You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG. The LAG by default
becomes a member of the management VLAN.
A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a LAG must
participate in the same protocols. A static port-channel interface does not require a partner
system to be able to aggregate its member ports.
Dynamic LAGs use Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Protocol Data Units (PDUs) to
exchange information with their link partners to help maintain the link state. Static LAGs are
also supported. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, it neither transmits nor
receives LACP PDUs. The GS510TP and GS110T Smart Switches each support four LAGs.
Static LAGs are supported. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, it neither
transmits nor receives LACP PDUs. GS716T supports 2 LAGs and the GS724T supports 4
LAGs.
From the LAGs link, you can access the following pages:
• LAG Configuration on page 75
• LAG Membership on page 76
• LACP Configuration on page 77
• LACP Port Configuration on page 78
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 75
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
LAG Configuration
Use the LAG (Port Channel) Configuration page to group one or more full-duplex Ethernet
links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group, which is also known as a
port-channel. The switch treats the LAG as if it were a single link.
To access the LAG Configuration page, click Switching LAG Basic LAG Configuration.
To configure LAG settings:
1. Select the check box next to the LAG to configure. You can select multiple LAGs to
apply the same setting to the selected interfaces. Select the check box in the heading
row to apply the same settings to all interfaces.
2. Configure or view the following settings:
• LAG Name. Specify the name you want assigned to the LAG. You may enter any
string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name has to be specified in order
to create the LAG
• Description. Specify the Description string to be attached to a LAG. It can be up to 64
characters in length.
• LAG ID. Displays the number assigned to the LAG. This field is read-only.
• Link Trap. Specify whether you want to have a trap sent when link status changes.
The factory default is Disable, which will cause the trap to be sent.
• Admin Mode. Select Enable or Disable from the menu. When the LAG (port channel)
is disabled, no traffic will flow and LACPDUs will be dropped, but the links that form
the LAG (port channel) will not be released. The factory default is Enable.
• STP Mode. Select the Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with
the LAG.
• LAG Type. Specifies whether the LAG is configured as a Static or LACP port. When
the LAG is static, it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs, for example the
member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it may receive are
dropped. The default is Static.
76 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Active Ports. A listing of the ports that are actively participating members of this Port
Channel. A maximum of 4 ports can be assigned to a port channel.
• LAG State. Indicates whether the link is Up or Down.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
4. If you make any changes to this page, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.
LAG Membership
Use the LAG Membership page to select two or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be
aggregated together to form a link aggregation group (LAG), which is also known as a
port-channel. The switch can treat the port-channel as if it were a single link.
To access the LAG Membership page, click Switching LAG Basic LAG Membership.
To create a LAG:
1. From the LAG ID field, select the LAG to configure.
2. In the LAG Name field, enter the name you want assigned to the LAG. You may enter any
string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name has to be specified to create the
LAG.
3. Click the orange bar to display the ports.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 77
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
4. Click the box below each port to include in the LAG. The following figure shows an example
of how to configure LAG1 with ports e1–e4 as members.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
6. If you make any changes to this page, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.
7. To view the ports that are members of the selected LAG, click Current Members.
LACP Configuration
To display the LACP Configuration page, click Switching LAG Advanced LACP
Configuration.
To configure LACP:
1. From the LACP System Priority field, specify the device’s link aggregation priority
relative to the devices at the other ends of the links on which link aggregation is
enabled. A higher value indicates a lower priority. You can change the value of the
parameter globally by specifying a priority from 0–65535. The default value is 32768.
2. Click Refresh to reload the page and display the most current information.
78 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
4. If you make any changes to this page, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.
LACP Port Configuration
To display the LACP Port Configuration page, click Switching LAG Advanced LACP
Port Configuration.
To configure LACP port priority settings:
1. Select the check box next to the port to configure. You can select multiple ports to apply
the same setting to all selected ports.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 79
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Note: You cannot select ports that are not participating in a LAG
2. Configure the LACP Priority value for the selected port. The field range is 0–255. The
default value is 128.
3. Configure the administrative LACP Timeout value.
• Long. Specifies a long timeout value.
• Short. Specifies a short timeout value.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. If you make any changes to this page, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.
80 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
VLANs
Adding Virtual LAN (VLAN) support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both
bridging and routing. Like a bridge, a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2
header, which is fast, and like a router, it partitions the network into logical segments, which
provides better administration, security and management of multicast traffic.
By default, all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain. VLANs electronically
separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast
packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch. When you use a VLAN, users can be
grouped by logical function instead of physical location.
Each VLAN in a network has an associated VLAN ID, which appears in the IEEE 802.1Q tag
in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN. An end station may omit the tag, or
the VLAN portion of the tag, in which case the first switch port to receive the packet may
either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID. A given port may handle traffic for
more than one VLAN, but it can only support one default VLAN ID.
From the VLAN link, you can access the following pages:
• VLAN Configuration on page 80
• VLAN Membership Configuration on page 81
• Port VLAN ID Configuration on page 83
VLAN Configuration
Use the VLAN Configuration page to define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership
table. The GS716T and GS724T support up to 64 VLANs. VLAN 1 is created by default, and
all ports are untagged members.
To display the VLAN Configuration page, lick Switching VLAN Basic VLAN
Configuration.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 81
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure VLANs:
1. To add a VLAN, configure the VLAN ID, name, and type, and then click Add.
• VLAN ID. Specify the VLAN Identifier for the new VLAN. (You can enter data in this
field only when you are creating a new VLAN.) The range of the VLAN ID is 1–4093.
• VLAN Name. Use this optional field to specify a name for the VLAN. It can be up to
32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The default is blank. VLAN ID 1 is
always named Default.
• VLAN Type. This field identifies the type of the VLAN you are configuring. You cannot
change the type of the default VLAN (VLAN ID = 1) because the type is always
Default. When you create a VLAN on this page, its type will always be Static.
2. To delete a VLAN, select the check box next to the VLAN ID and click Delete. You cannot
delete the default VLAN.
3. To modify settings for a VLAN, select the check box next to the VLAN ID, change the
desired information, and then click Apply. Configuration changes occur immediately.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. To reset the VLAN settings on the switch to the factory defaults, select the Reset
Configuration check box, and click OK in the popup message to confirm. If the
Management VLAN is set to a non-default VLAN (VLAN 1), it is automatically set to 1 after
a Reset Configuration.
VLAN Membership Configuration
Use this page to configure VLAN Port Membership for a particular VLAN. You can select the
Group operation through this page.
82 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To display the VLAN Membership Configuration page, click Switching VLAN Advanced
VLAN Membership.
To configure VLAN membership:
1. From the VLAN ID field, select the VLAN to which you want to add ports.
2. Click the orange bar below the VLAN Type field to display the physical ports on the switch.
3. Click the lower orange bar to display the LAGs on the switch.
4. To select the port(s) or LAG(s) to add to the VLAN, click the square below each port or LAG.
You can add each interface as a tagged (T) or untagged (U) VLAN member. A blank square
means that the port is not a member of the VLAN.
• Tagged: Frames transmitted from this port are tagged with the port VLAN ID.
• Untagged: Frames transmitted from this port are untagged. Each port can be an
untagged member of only one VLAN. By default, all ports are an untagged member of
VLAN 1.
In the following figure, ports e6, e7, and e8 are being added as tagged members to
VLAN 2.
5. Use the Group Operations field to select all the ports and configure them. Possible values
are:
• Untag All: Select all the ports on which all frames transmitted from this VLAN will be
untagged. All the ports will be included in the VLAN.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 83
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Tag All: Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN will be tagged.
All the ports will be included in the VLAN.
• Remove All: This selection has the effect of excluding all ports from the selected
VLAN.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
7. If you make any changes to this page, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes take place immediately.
Port VLAN ID Configuration
The Port PVID Configuration screen lets you assign a port VLAN ID (PVID) to an interface.
There are certain requirements for a PVID:
• All ports must have a defined PVID.
• If no other value is specified, the default VLAN PVID is used.
• If you want to change the port’s default PVID, you must first create a VLAN that includes
the port as a member.
• Use the Port VLAN ID (PVID) Configuration page to configure a virtual LAN on a port.
To access the Port PVID Configuration page, click Switching VLAN Advanced Port
PVID Configuration.
84 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure PVID information:
1. To configure PVID settings for a physical port, click PORTS.
2. To configure PVID settings for a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), click LAGS.
3. To configure PVID settings for both physical ports and LAGs, click ALL.
4. Select the check box next to the interfaces to configure. You can select multiple interfaces to
apply the same setting to the selected interfaces. Select the check box in the heading row to
apply the same settings to all interfaces.
5. Configure the PVID to assign to untagged or priority tagged frames received on this port.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 85
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
6. Specify how you want the port to handle untagged and priority tagged frames. Whichever
you select, VLAN tagged frames will be forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN standard. The factory default is Admit All.
• VLAN Only: The port will discard any untagged or priority tagged frames it receives.
• Admit All: Untagged and priority tagged frames received on the port will be accepted
and assigned the value of the Port VLAN ID for this port.
7. Specify how you want the port to handle tagged frames:
• Enable: A tagged frame will be discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN
identified by the VLAN ID in the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the Port
VLAN ID specified for the port that received this frame.
• Disable: All frames are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
standard. The factory default is Disable.
8. Specify the default 802.1p priority assigned to untagged packets arriving at the port. Possible
values are 0–7.
9. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
10. If you make any changes to this page, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes take place immediately.
86 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Voice VLAN
Configure the Voice VLAN settings for ports that carry traffic from IP phones. The Voice
VLAN feature can help ensure that the sound quality of an IP phone is safeguarded from
deteriorating when the data traffic on the port is high.
From the VLAN link, you can access the following pages:
• Voice VLAN Properties on page 86
• Voice VLAN Port Setting on page 87
• Voice VLAN OUI on page 88
Voice VLAN Properties
To display the Voice VLAN Properties page, click Switching Voice VLAN Basic
Properties.
To configure Voice VLAN:
1. From the Voice VLAN Status field, enable or disable Voice VLAN on the switch. If the
switch does not handle traffic from IP phones, the status should be disabled.
2. From the Voice VLAN ID field, select the VLAN to use for voice traffic on the switch. The
VLAN must already exist on the switch. For information about how to create VLANs, see
VLAN Configuration on page 80.
3. From the Class of Service field, set the CoS tag value to be reassigned for packets
received on the Voice VLAN when Remark CoS is enabled.
4. From the Remark CoS field, select Enable or Disable to reassign the CoS tag value to
packets received on the Voice VLAN.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 87
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
5. From the Voice VLAN Aging Time field, specify the amount of time after the last IP phone’s
OUI is aged out for a specific port. The port will age out after the bridge and voice aging
time.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
7. If you make any changes to this page, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch.
Voice VLAN Port Setting
To display the Voice VLAN Port Setting page, click Switching Voice VLAN Advanced
Port Setting.
88 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure Voice VLAN port settings:
1. Select the check box next to the port to configure. You can select multiple check boxes
to apply the same setting to all selected ports.
2. From the Voice VLAN Mode menu, specify whether to enable or disable Voice VLAN on the
selected port.
3. From the Voice VLAN Security menu, specify whether to enable or disable Voice VLAN
security on the selected port.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. If you make any changes to this page, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch.
Note: The Membership field displays whether the current operational
status of the voice VLAN on the interface is active or not active.
Voice VLAN OUI
The Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) identifies the IP phone manufacturer. The switch
comes preconfigured with the following OUIs:
• 00:01:E3: SIEMENS
• 00:03:6B: CISCO1
• 00:12:43: CISCO2
• 00:0F:E2: H3C
• 00:60:B9: NITSUKO
• 00:D0:1E: PINTEL
• 00:E0:75: VERILINK
• 00:E0:BB: 3COM
• 00:04:0D: AVAYA1
• 00:1B:4F: AVAYA2
You can select an existing OUI or add a new OUI and description to identify the IP phones on
the network.
To display the Voice VLAN OUI page, click Switching Voice VLAN Advanced OUI.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 89
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
90 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Auto-VoIP
The Auto-VoIP automatically makes sure that time-sensitive voice traffic is given priority over
data traffic on ports that have this feature enabled. Auto-VoIP checks for packets carrying the
following VoIP protocols:
• Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
• H.323
• Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP)
• Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP)
VoIP frames that are received on ports that have the Auto-VoIP feature enabled are marked
with CoS traffic class 3.
To display the Auto-VoIP page, click Switching Auto-VoIP.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 91
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure Auto-VoIP settings:
1. Select the check box next to the port to configure. You can select multiple check boxes
to apply the same setting to all selected ports.
2. From the Auto-VoIP Mode menu, specify whether to enable or disable Auto-VoIP on the
selected port.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
4. If you make any changes to this page, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch.
92 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure OUI settings:
1. To add a new OUI prefix, type the VOIP OUI prefix in the Telephony OUI(s) field,
provide a description of the prefix, and click Add. The OUI prefix must be in the format
AA:BB:CC.
2. To delete an OUI prefix from the list, select the check box next to the OUI prefix and click
Delete.
3. Tomodify information for an entry in the OUI list, select the check box next to the OUI prefix,
update the OUI prefix or description, and then click Apply.
4. Click Cancelto cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest valueof the switch.
5. Click Restore Defaults to restore the list to the preconfigured OUIs.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 93
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Spanning Tree Protocol
The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides a tree topology for any arrangement of bridges.
STP also provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops. Spanning
tree versions supported include Common STP, Multiple STP, and Rapid STP.
Classic STP provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops. For
information on configuring Common STP, see CST Port Configuration on page 97.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) supports multiple instances of Spanning Tree to
efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces. Each instance of the Spanning Tree
behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP), with slight
modifications in the working but not the end effect (chief among the effects, is the rapid
transitioning of the port to ‘Forwarding’). The difference between the RSTP and the traditional
STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity and ports
which are connected to end stations, resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to ‘Forwarding’
state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification. These features are represented
by the parameters ‘pointtopoint’ and ‘edgeport’. MSTP is compatible to both RSTP and STP.
It behaves appropriately to STP and RSTP bridges. A MSTP bridge can be configured to
behave entirely as a RSTP bridge or a STP bridge.
Note: For two bridges to be in the same region, the force version should
be 802.1s and their configuration name, digest key, and revision
level should match. For additional information about regions and
their effect on network topology, refer to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
The Spanning Tree folder contains links to the following features:
• STP Switch Configuration on page 93
• CST Configuration on page 95
• CST Port Configuration on page 97
• CST Port Status on page 99
• Rapid STP on page 102
• MST Configuration on page 103
• MST Port Configuration on page 104
• STP Statistics on page 107
STP Switch Configuration
The Spanning Tree Switch Configuration/Status page contains fields for enabling STP on the
switch.
To display the Spanning Tree Switch Configuration/Status page, click Switching > STP >
Basic STP Configuration.
94 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure STP settings on the switch:
1. From the Spanning Tree State field, specify whether to enable or disable Spanning
Tree operation on the switch.
2. From the STP Operation Mode field, Specifies the Force Protocol Version parameter for the
switch. Options are:
• STP (Spanning Tree Protocol): IEEE 802.1D
• RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol): IEEE 802.1w
• MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol): IEEE 802.1s
3. Specify the configuration name and revision level.
• Configuration Name. Name used to identify the configuration currently being used. It
may be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
• Configuration Revision Level. Number used to identify the configuration currently
being used. The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value is 0.
4. Specify the BPDU Flooding status for all ports or for individual ports. When this feature is
enabled, BPDU packets arriving at this port are flooded to other ports if STP is disabled.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 95
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
6. If you make any configuration changes, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes occur immediately.
The following table describes the STP Status information displayed on the screen.
Click Refresh to update the information on the screen with the most current data.
CST Configuration
Use the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page to configure Common Spanning Tree (CST)
and Internal Spanning Tree on the switch.
To display the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page, click Switching > STP > Advanced
CST Configuration.
Field Description
Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and
the base MAC address of the bridge.
Time Since Topology Change The time in seconds since the topology of the CST last changed.
Topology Change Count The number of times the topology has changed for the CST.
Topology Change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a
topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST. The value is
either True or False.
Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority
and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Root Path Cost Path cost to the Designated Root for the CST.
Root Port Port to access the Designated Root for the CST.
Max Age (secs) Specifies the bridge maximum age for CST. The value must be less than or
equal to (2 X Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater than or equal to 2 X
(Bridge Hello Time +1).
Forward Delay (secs) Derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay parameter.
Hold TIme (secs) Minimum time between transmission of Configuration BPDUs.
CST Regional Root Priority and base MAC address of the CST Regional Root.
CST Path Cost Path Cost to the CST tree Regional Root.
96 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure CST settings:
1. Specify values for CST in the appropriate fields:
• Bridge Priority. When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a
priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes
the root bridge. Specifies the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CST). The valid range is 0–61440. The bridge priority is a multiple of
4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically
set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if the priority is
attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095, it will be set to 0. The default
priority is 32768.
• Bridge Max Age (secs). Specifies the bridge maximum age time for the Common
and Internal Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the amount of time in seconds a
bridge waits before implementing a topological change. The valid range is 6–40, and
the value must be less than or equal to (2 * Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater
than or equal to 2 * (Bridge Hello Time +1). The default value is 20.
• Bridge Hello Time (secs). Specifies the switch Hello time for the Common and
Internal Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the amount of time in seconds a root
bridge waits between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2 seconds.
• Bridge Forward Delay (secs). Specifies the switch forward delay time, which
indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning
state before forwarding packets. The value must be greater or equal to (Bridge Max
Age / 2) + 1. The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds. The default value is 15.
• Spanning Tree Maximum Hops. Specifies the maximum number of bridge hops the
information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded. The valid
range is 1–127.
2. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 97
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
3. If you make any configuration changes, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes take place immediately.
The following table describes the MSTP status information displayed on the Spanning Tree
CST Configuration page.
Click Refresh to update the information on the screen with the most current data.
CST Port Configuration
Use the Spanning Tree CST Port Configuration page to configure Common Spanning Tree
(CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch.
To display the Spanning Tree CST Port Configuration page, click Switching > STP >
Advanced CST Port Configuration.
Field Description
MST ID Table consisting of the MST instances (including the CST) and the
corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.
VID Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID associated with
each of them
FID Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated
with each of them.
98 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure CST port settings:
1. To configure CST settings for a physical port, click PORTS.
2. To configure CST settings for a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), click LAGS.
3. To configure CST settings for both physical ports and LAGs, click ALL.
4. Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure. You can select multiple ports and
LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces. Select the check box in the
heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces.
5. Configure the CST values for the selected port(s) or LAG(s):
• STP Status. Enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode
associated with the port or port channel.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 99
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Fast Link. Specifies if the specified port is an Edge Port with the CST. Possible
values are Enable or Disable. The default is Disable.
• Port State. The Forwarding state of this port. This field is read-only.
• Path Cost. Set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the common and
internal spanning tree. It takes a value in the range of 1–200000000.
• Priority. The priority for a particular port within the CST. The port priority is set in
multiples of 16. If you specify a value that is not a multiple of 16, the priority is set to
the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 16. For
example, if you set a value between 0 and 15, the priority is set to 0. If you specify a
number between 16 and 31, the priority is set to 16.
• External Port Path Cost. Set the External Path Cost to a new value for the specified
port in the spanning tree. It takes a value in the range of 1–200000000.
• Port ID. The port identifier for the specified port within the CST. It is made up from the
port priority and the interface number of the port.
• Hello Timer. Specifies the switch Hello time, which indicates the amount of time in
seconds a port waits between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2
seconds.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
7. If you make any configuration changes, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes take place immediately.
8. Click Refresh to update the information on the screen with the most current data.
CST Port Status
Use the Spanning Tree CST Port Status page to display Common Spanning Tree (CST) and
Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch.
To display the Spanning Tree CST Port Status page, click Switching > STP > Advanced
CST Port Status.
100 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the screen.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 101
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to update the information on the screen with the most current data.
Field Description
Interface Select a physical or port channel interface to configure. The port is
associated with the VLAN(s) associated with the CST.
Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each
spanning tree. The port role will be one of the following values: Root Port,
Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled
Port.
Designated Root Root Bridge for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base
MAC address of the bridge.
Designated Cost Displays cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower
cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops.
Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port. It is made up using
the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Designated Port Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the
LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.
Topology Change
Acknowledge
Identifies whether the next BPDU to be transmitted for this port would have
the topology change acknowledgement flag set. It is either True or False.
Edge Port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port. Possible values are
Enabled or Disabled.
Point-to-point MAC Derived value of the point-to-point status.
CST Regional Root Displays the bridge priority and base MAC address of the CST Regional
Root.
CST Path Cost Displays the path Cost to the CST tree Regional Root.
Port Forwarding State Displays the Forwarding State of this port.
102 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Rapid STP
Use the Rapid STP page to view information about Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) port status.
To display the Rapid STP page, click Switching > STP > Advanced RSTP.
The following table describes the Rapid STP Status information displayed on the screen.
Field Description
Interface The physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST.
Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree.
The port role will be one of the following values: Root Port, Designated Port, Alternate
Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled Port.
Mode Specifies the spanning tree operation mode. Different modes are STP, RSTP, and MSTP.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 103
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to update the information on the screen with the most current data.
MST Configuration
Use the Spanning Tree MST Configuration page to configure Multiple Spanning Tree (MST)
on the switch.
To display the Spanning Tree MST Configuration page, click Switching > STP > Advanced
MST Configuration.
To configure an MST instance:
1. To add an MST instance, configure the MST values and click Add:
• MST ID. Specify the ID of the MST to create. Valid values for this are between 1 and
4094.
• Priority. Specifies the bridge priority value for the MST. When switches or bridges are
running STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the
lowest priority value becomes the root bridge. The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096.
If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically set to
the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if the priority is
attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095, it will be set to 0. The default
priority is 32768.The valid range is 0–61440.
Fast Link Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port.
Status The Forwarding State of this port.
Field Description
104 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• VLAN ID. The menu contains all VLANs configured on the switch. Select a VLAN to
associate with the MST instance.
2. To delete an MST instance, select the check box next to the instance and click Delete.
3. To modify an MST instance, select the check box next to the instance to configure, update
the values, and click Apply. You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting
to all selected ports.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
For each configured instance, the information described in the following table displays on the
page.
MST Port Configuration
Use the Spanning Tree MST Port Configuration page to configure and display Multiple
Spanning Tree (MST) settings on a specific port on the switch.
To display the Spanning Tree MST Port Status page, click Switching STP Advanced
MST Port Configuration. The following figure shows the Web page.
Field Description
Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge priority
and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Time Since
Topology
Change
Displays the total amount of time since the topology of the selected MST instance last
changed. The time is displayed in hour/minute/second format, for example, 5 hours, 10
minutes, and 4 seconds.
Topology
Change Count
Displays the total number of times topology has changed for the selected MST instance.
Topology
Change
Indicates whether a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected
MST instance. The possible values are True or False.
Designated Root Displays the bridge identifier of the root bridge, which is made up from the bridge priority
and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Root Path Cost Displays the path cost to the Designated Root for this MST instance.
Root Port Indicates the port to access the Designated Root for this MST instance.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 105
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
106 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Note: If no MST instances have been configured on the switch, the page
displays a “No MSTs Available” message.
To configure MST port settings:
1. To configure MST settings for a physical port, click PORTS.
2. To configure MST settings for a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), click LAGS.
3. To configure MST settings for both physical ports and LAGs, click ALL.
4. Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure. You can select multiple ports and
LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces. Select the check box in the
heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces.
5. Configure the MST values for the selected port(s) or LAG(s):
• Port Priority. The priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance. The
port priority is set in multiples of 16. If you specify a value that is not a multiple of 16,
the priority is set to the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a
multiple of 16. For example, if you set a value between 0 and 15, the priority is set to
0. If you specify a number between 16 and 31, the priority is set to 16. It takes a value
in the range of 0–240.
• Port Path Cost. Set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected
MST instance. It takes a value in the range of 1–200000000.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch
7. If you make any configuration changes, click Apply to send the updated configuration to the
switch. Configuration changes take place immediately.
The following table describes the read-only MST port configuration information displayed on
the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page
Field Description
Auto-calculated Port Path
Cost
Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enabled) or not
(Disabled). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the
configured value for Port Path Cost is zero.
Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance. It
is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.
Port Up Time Since Counters
Last Cleared
Time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in Days, Hours,
Minutes, and Seconds.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 107
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to update the screen with the latest MST information.
STP Statistics
Use the Spanning Tree Statistics page to view information about the number and type of
bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) transmitted and received on each port.
To display the Spanning Tree Statistics page, click Switching STP Advanced STP
Statistics.
Port Mode Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the port or port
channel. Possible values are Enable or Disable.
Port Forwarding State Indicates the current STP state of a port. If enabled, the port state
determines what forwarding action is taken on traffic. Possible port states
are:
• Disabled: STP is currently disabled on the port. The port forwards traffic
while learning MAC addresses.
• Blocking: The port is currently blocked and cannot be used to forward
traffic or learn MAC addresses.
• Listening: The port is currently in the listening mode. The port cannot
forward traffic nor can it learn MAC addresses.
• Learning: The port is currently in the learning mode. The port cannot
forward traffic, however, it can learn new MAC addresses.
• Forwarding: The port is currently in the forwarding mode. The port
can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses
Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each
spanning tree. The port role will be one of the following values: Root Port,
Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled
Port.
Designated Root Root Bridge for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge
priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Designated Cost Displays cost of the port participating in the STP topology. Ports with a lower
cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops.
Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port. It is made up using
the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Designated Port Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the
LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.
Field Description
108 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table describes the information available on the STP Statistics page.
Click Refresh to update the screen with the latest STP statistics information.
Field Description
Interface Select a physical or port channel interface to view its statistics.
STP BPDUs Received Number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port.
STP BPDUs Transmitted Number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.
RSTP BPDUs Received Number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.
RSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.
MSTP BPDUs Received Number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 109
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Multicast
Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups are identified by
class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
From the Multicast link, you can access the following pages:
• Auto-Video Configuration on page 109
• IGMP Snooping on page 110
• IGMP Snooping on page 110
• IGMP Snooping Querier on page 119
Auto-Video Configuration
The Auto-Video feature simplifies IGMP Snooping Querier configuration if the switch
supports devices or applications running multicast traffic, such as video surveillance
cameras.
To access the Auto-Video Configuration page, click Switching Multicast Auto-Video.
To configure the Auto-Video feature:
1. Enable or disable the Auto-Video feature.
• Enable. The IGMP Snooping Querier is automatically configured with the default
VLAN ID for the Auto-Video VLAN
• Disable. IGMP Snooping settings must be manually configured.
2. Click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes take
effect immediately.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch
110 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
IGMP Snooping
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping is a feature that allows a switch to
forward multicast traffic intelligently on the switch. Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined
to a host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from
224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch
forwards traffic only to the ports that request the multicast traffic. This prevents the switch
from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance.
A traditional Ethernet network may be separated into different network segments to prevent
placing too many devices onto the same shared media. Bridges and switches connect these
segments. When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received, the
switch will forward a copy into each of the remaining network segments in accordance with
the IEEE MAC Bridge standard. Eventually, the packet is made accessible to all nodes
connected to the network.
This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be seen or processed by
all connected nodes. In the case of multicast packets, however, this approach could lead to
less efficient use of network bandwidth, particularly when the packet is intended for only a
small number of nodes. Packets will be flooded into network segments where no node has
any interest in receiving the packet. While nodes will rarely incur any processing overhead to
filter packets addressed to unrequested group addresses, they are unable to transmit new
packets onto the shared media for the period of time that the multicast packet is flooded. The
problem of wasting bandwidth is even worse when the LAN segment is not shared, for
example in full-duplex links.
Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets is a creative effort to solve this problem. The
switch uses the information in the IGMP packets as they are being forwarded throughout the
network to determine which segments should receive packets directed to the group address.
IGMP Snooping Configuration
Use the IGMP Snooping Configuration page to configure the parameters for IGMP snooping,
which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic.
To access the IGMP Snooping Configuration page, click Switching Multicast IGMP
Snooping IGMP Snooping Configuration.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 111
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure IGMP Snooping:
1. Enable or disable IGMP Snooping on the switch.
• Enable. The switch snoops all IGMP packets it receives to determine which segments
should receive packets directed to the group address.
• Disable. The switch does not snoop IGMP packets.
2. Choose whether to validate the IGMP IP header.
• Enable. The switch checks the IP header of all IGMP messages for the Router Alert
option. If the option is not present, the packet is dropped.
• Disable. The IGMP IP header is not checked for Router Alert option.
3. Choose whether to block unknown multicast addresses.
• Enable. Packets with unknown multicast MAC address in the destination field will be
dropped.
• Disable. Packets with unknown destination multicast MAC addresses are processed.
4. Click Apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes take
effect immediately.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch
112 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status and statistics
on the page.
IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration
Use the IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration page to configure IGMP snooping settings
on specific interfaces.
To access the IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration page, click Switching Multicast
IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration.
Field Description
Multicast Control Frame
Count
Displays the number of multicast control frames that have been processed
by the CPU.
Interfaces Enabled for IGMP
Snooping
Lists the interfaces currently enabled for IGMP Snooping. To enable
interfaces for IGMP snooping, see IGMP Snooping Interface Configuration
on page 112.
Data Frames Forwarded by
the CPU
Displays the number of data frames forwarded by the CPU.
VLAN Ids Enabled For IGMP
Snooping
Displays VLAN IDs enabled for IGMP snooping. To enable VLANs for IGMP
snooping, see IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration on page 117.
VLAN Ids Enabled For IGMP
Snooping Querier
Displays VLAN IDs enabled for IGMP snooping querier.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 113
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure IGMP Snooping interface settings:
1. To configure IGMP Snooping settings for a physical port, click PORTS.
2. To configure IGMP Snooping settings for a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), click LAGS.
3. To configure IGMP Snooping settings for both physical ports and LAGs, click ALL.
4. Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure. You can select multiple ports and
LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces. Select the check box in the
heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces.
5. Configure the IGMP Snooping values for the selected port(s) or LAG(s):
• Admin Mode. Select the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP Snooping
for the switch from the menu. The default is Disable.
• Host Timeout. Specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait for a report for
a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the
group. Enter a value between 2 and 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.
• Max Response Time. Specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait after
sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular
group on that interface. Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the Host
Timeout, in seconds. The default is 10 seconds.
• MRouter Timeout. Specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait to receive
a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast
routers attached. Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0
seconds. A value of zero indicates an infinite timeout; no expiration.
114 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Fast Leave Admin Mode. Select the Fast Leave mode for a particular interface from
the menu. The default is Disable.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
7. If you make any configuration changes, click Apply to apply the new settings to the switch.
Configuration changes take effect immediately.
IGMP Snooping Table
Use the IGMP Snooping Table page to view all of the entries in the Multicast Forwarding
Database that were created for IGMP snooping.
To access the IGMP Snooping Table page, click Switching Multicast IGMP Snooping
IGMP Snooping Table.
The following table describes the fields in the IGMP Snooping Table.
Field Description
MAC Address A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering
information. The format is 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are
separated by colons, for example, 01:00:5e:45:67:89.
VLAN ID A VLAN ID for which the switch has forwarding and filtering information.
Type This displays the type of the entry. Static entries are those that are
configured by the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a
result of a learning process or protocol.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 115
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions:
• Click Clear to clear one or all of the IGMP Snooping entries.
• Click Refresh to reload the page and display the most current information.
Multicast Forwarding Database Table
The Layer 2 Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) is used by the switch to make
forwarding decisions for packets that arrive with a multicast destination MAC address. By
limiting multicasts to only certain ports in the switch, traffic is prevented from going to parts of
the network where that traffic is unnecessary.
When a packet enters the switch, the destination MAC address is combined with the VLAN
ID and a search is performed in the Layer 2 Multicast Forwarding Database. If no match is
found, then the packet is either flooded to all ports in the VLAN or discarded, depending on
the switch configuration. If a match is found, then the packet is forwarded only to the ports
that are members of that multicast group.
Use the MFDB Table page to view the port membership information for all active multicast
address entries. The key for an entry consists of a MAC address. Entries may contain data
for more than one protocol.
To access the MFDB Table page, click Switching Multicast IGMP Snooping MFDB
Table.
The following table describes the fields in the MFDB Table.
Description The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are
Management Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.
Interface The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd) and filtering
(Flt) for the associated address.
Field Description
116 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to update the information on the screen with the most current data.
MFDB Statistics
Use the multicast forwarding database Statistics page to view statistical information about the
MFDB table.
To access the MFDB Statistics page, click Switching Multicast IGMP Snooping MFDB
Statistics.
Field Description
MAC Address The MAC Address to which the multicast MAC address is related.
To search by MAC address, enter the address with the MFDB table entry you want
displayed. Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for
example 00:0f:43:67:89:AB, and then click Go. If the address exists, that entry will
be displayed. An exact match is required.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related.
Component This is the component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding
Database. Possible values are IGMP Snooping or Static Filtering.
Type This displays the type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the
end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or
protocol.
Description The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are Management
Configured, Network Configured, and Network Assisted.
Interface The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd) and filtering (Flt) for
the selected address.
Forwarding Interfaces The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the forwarding interfaces
and removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 117
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table describes the information available on the MFDB Statistics page:
Click Refresh to update the information on the screen with the most current data.
IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration
Use the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page to configure IGMP snooping settings for
VLANs on the system.
To access the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page, click Switching Multicast IGMP
Snooping IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.
Field Description
Max MFDB Table
Entries
Displays the maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding Database
table can hold.
Most MFDB Entries
Since Last Reset
The largest number of entries that have been present in the Multicast Forwarding
Database table since the system was last reset. This value is also known as the
MFDB high-water mark.
Current Entries Displays the current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.
118 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure IGMP snooping settings for VLANs:
1. To enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN, enter the VLAN ID in the appropriate field and
configure the IGMP Snooping values:
• Fast Leave Admin Mode. Enable or disable the IGMP Snooping Fast Leave Mode
for the specified VLAN ID. Enabling fast-leave allows the switch to immediately
remove the layer 2 LAN interface from its forwarding table entry upon receiving an
IGMP leave message for that multicast group without first sending out MAC-based
general queries to the interface.You should enable fast-leave admin mode only on
VLANs where only one host is connected to each layer 2 LAN port. This prevents the
inadvertent dropping of the other hosts that were connected to the same layer 2 LAN
port but were still interested in receiving multicast traffic directed to that group. Also,
fast-leave processing is supported only with IGMP version 2 hosts.
• Host Timeout. Sets the value for group membership interval of IGMP snooping for
the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is (Maximum Response Time + 1) to 3600
seconds.
• Maximum Response Time. Enter the amount of time in seconds that a switch will
wait after sending a query on the VLAN because it did not receive a report for a
particular group in that interface. value. The valid range is 1 to 25 seconds. Its value
must be less than the Host Timeout value.
• MRouter Timeout. Enter the amount of time that a switch will wait to receive a query
on the VLAN before removing it from the list of VLANs with multicast routers attached.
Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds, which means
there is no expiration.
• Query Mode. Enable or disable the IGMP Querier Mode for the specified VLAN ID.
• Query Interval. Enter the value for IGMP Query Interval for the specified VLAN ID.
The valid range is 1–1800 seconds. The default is 60 seconds.
2. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 119
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
3. To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN and remove it from the list, select the check box next
to the VLAN ID and click Delete.
4. To modify IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN, select the check box next to the VLAN ID,
update the desired values, and click Apply.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
IGMP Snooping Querier
IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end-devices
on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the IGMP
querier. The IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with
the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not
receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it will stop forwarding multicasts
to the port where the end device is located.
These pages enable you to configure and display information on IGMP snooping queriers on
the network and, separately, on VLANs.
The IGMP Snooping Querier feature contains links to the following pages:
•IGMP Snooping Querier Configuration on page 119
•IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration on page 120
•IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Status on page 121
IGMP Snooping Querier Configuration
Use this page to enable or disable the IGMP Snooping Querier feature, specify the IP
address of the router to perform the querying, and configure the related parameters.
To access this page, click Switching Multicast IGMP Snooping Querier IGMP
Snooping Querier Configuration.
To configure IGMP Snooping Querier settings:
120 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
1. From the Querier Admin Mode field, enable or disable the administrative mode for
IGMP Snooping Querier.
2. In the Snooping Querier Address field, specify the IP address to be used as source
address in periodic IGMP queries. This address is used when no address is configured on
the VLAN on which the query is being sent.
3. In the IGMP Version field, specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries.
4. In the Query Interval field, specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries
sent by the snooping querier. The Query Interval must be a value in the range of 1–1800
seconds. The default value is 60.
5. In the Querier Expiry Interval field, specify the time interval in seconds after which the last
querier information is removed. The Querier Expiry Interval must be a value in the range of
60–300 seconds. The default value is 60.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
7. Click Apply to apply the new settings to the switch. Configuration changes take effect
immediately
8. Click Refresh to update the page with the latest information from the switch.
IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Configuration
Use this page to configure IGMP queriers for use with VLANs on the network.
To access this page, click Switching Multicast IGMP Snooping Querier Querier VLAN
Configuration.
To configure Querier VLAN settings:
1. To create a new VLAN ID for IGMP Snooping, select New Entry from the VLAN ID field
and complete the following fields:
• VLAN ID. Specifies the VLAN ID for which the IGMP Snooping Querier is to be
enabled.
• Querier Election Participate Mode. Enable or disable Querier Participate Mode.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 121
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Disabled. Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN, the
snooping querier moves to the non-querier state.
• Enabled. The snooping querier participates in querier election, in which the least
IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to
non-querier state.
• Snooping Querier VLAN Address. Specify the Snooping Querier IP Address to be
used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries sent on the specified VLAN.
2. Click Apply to apply the new settings to the switch. Configuration changes take effect
immediately
3. To disable Snooping Querier on a VLAN, select the VLAN ID and click Delete.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. Click Refresh to update the page with the latest information from the switch.
IGMP Snooping Querier VLAN Status
Use this page to view the operational state and other information for IGMP snooping queriers
for VLANs on the network.
To access this page, click Switching Multicast IGMP Snooping Querier Querier VLAN
Status.
The following table describes the information available on the Querier VLAN Status page.
122 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to redisplay the page with the latest information from the switch.
Forwarding Database
The forwarding database maintains a list of MAC addresses after having received a packet
from this MAC address. The transparent bridging function uses the forwarding database
entries to determine how to forward a received frame.
The Address Table folder contains links to the following features:
• MAC Address Table on page 122
• Dynamic Address Configuration on page 124
• Static MAC Address on page 125
MAC Address Table
The MAC Address Table contains information about unicast entries for which the switch has
forwarding and/or filtering information. This information is used by the transparent bridging
function in determining how to propagate a received frame. Use the search function of the
MAC Address Table page to display information about the entries in the table.
Field Description
VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID on which the IGMP Snooping Querier is
administratively enabled and for which VLAN exists in the VLAN database.
Operational State Specifies the operational state of the IGMP Snooping Querier on a VLAN:
• Querier: The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping
switch will send out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the
configured querier query interval. If the snooping switch sees a better
querier (numerically lower) in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.
• Non-Querier: The snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN.
If the querier expiry interval timer expires, the snooping switch moves
into querier mode.
• Disabled: The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The
snooping querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP snooping is not
operational on the VLAN, when the querier address is not configured, or
the network management address is not configured.
Operational Version Displays the IGMP protocol version of the operational querier.
Last Querier Address Displays the IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped
on the VLAN.
Last Querier Version Displays the IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query
was snooped on the VLAN.
Operational Max Response
Time
Displays the maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent
by the snooping querier.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 123
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To access this page, click Switching Address Table Basic Address Table.
To search for an entry in the MAC Address Table:
1. Use the Search By field to search for MAC Addresses by MAC Address, VLAN ID, or
Interface.
• MAC Address: Select MAC Address from the menu and enter a six-byte
hexadecimal MAC address in two-digit groups separated by colons, then click Go. If
the address exists, that entry will be displayed. An exact match is required.
• VLAN ID: Select VLAN ID from the menu, enter the VLAN ID, for example, 100. Then
click Go. If any entries with that VLAN ID exist they are displayed.
• Interface: Select Interface from the menu, enter the interface ID in g1, g2... format,
then, click Go. If any entries learned on that interface exist, they are displayed.
2. Click Clear to clear Dynamic MAC Addresses in the table.
3. Click Refresh to redisplay the page to show the latest MAC Addresses.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
124 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table describes the information available for each entry in the address table.
Dynamic Address Configuration
Use the Dynamic Addresses page to set the amount of time to keep a learned MAC address
entry in the forwarding database. The forwarding database contains static entries, which are
never aged out, and dynamically learned entries, which are removed if they are not updated
within a given time.
To access the Configuration page, click Switching Address Table Advanced Dynamic
Addresses.
To configure the Dynamic Address setting:
1. Specify the number of seconds the forwarding database should wait before deleting a
learned entry that has not been updated. IEEE 802.1D-1990 recommends a default of
300 seconds. You may enter any number of seconds between 10 and 1000000. The
factory default is 300.
Field Description
VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID on which the IGMP Snooping Querier is
administratively enabled and for which VLAN exists in the VLAN database.
MAC Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering
information. The format is a six-byte MAC address with each byte separated
by colons. For example, 00:0F:89:AB:CD:EF.
Interface The port where this address was learned: that is, this field displays the port
through which the MAC address can be reached.
Status The status of this entry. The possible values are:
• Static: The entry was added when a static MAC filter was defined.
• Learned: The entry was learned by observing the source MAC
addresses of incoming traffic, and is currently in use.
• Management: The system MAC address, which is identified with
interface c1.
Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information | 125
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Note: IEEE 802.1D recommends a default of 300 seconds, which is the
factory default.
2. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
3. Click Apply to apply to send the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes
take effect immediately.
Static MAC Address
Use the Static MAC Address Configuration page to configure and view static MAC addresses
on an interface.
To access the Static MAC Address Configuration page, click Switching Address Table
Advanced Static MAC Address.
To configure a static MAC address:
1. To add a static MAC address entry
a. Select the VLAN ID corresponding to the MAC address to add.
b. Specify the MAC address to add.
c. Specify the interface associated with the MAC address.
d. Click Add.
2. To delete a static MAC address, select the check box next to the entry and click Delete.
3. To modify the settings for a static MAC address, select the check box next to the entry,
update the desired values, and click Apply.
4. Click Refresh to reload the page and display the latest MAC address learned on a specific
port.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
126 | Chapter 3: Configuring Switching Information
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 127
4. Configuring Quality of Service 4
Use the features in the QoS tab to configure Quality of Service (QoS) settings on the switch. The
QoS tab contains links to the following features:
• Class of Service on page 128
• Differentiated Services on page 135
In a typical switch, each physical port consists of one or more queues for transmitting packets on
the attached network. Multiple queues per port are often provided to give preference to certain
packets over others based on user-defined criteria. When a packet is queued for transmission in
a port, the rate at which it is serviced depends on how the queue is configured and possibly the
amount of traffic present in the other queues of the port. If a delay is necessary, packets get held
in the queue until the scheduler authorizes the queue for transmission. As queues become full,
packets have no place to be held for transmission and get dropped by the switch.
QoS is a means of providing consistent, predictable data delivery by distinguishing between
packets that have strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of delay. Packets
with strict timing requirements are given “special treatment” in a QoS-capable network. With this
in mind, all elements of the network must be QoS-capable. The presence of at least one node
which is not QoS-capable creates a deficiency in the network path and the performance of the
entire packet flow is compromised.
128 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Class of Service
The Class of Service (CoS) queueing feature lets you directly configure certain aspects of
switch queueing. This provides the desired QoS behavior for different types of network traffic
when the complexities of DiffServ are not required. The priority of a packet arriving at an
interface can be used to steer the packet to the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a
mapping table. CoS queue characteristics that affect queue mapping, such as minimum
guaranteed bandwidth, or transmission rate shaping are user-configurable at the queue (or
port) level.
Four queues per port are supported.
From the Class of Service link under the QoS tab, you can access the following pages:
• Basic CoS Configuration on page 128
• CoS Interface Configuration on page 129
• Interface Queue Configuration on page 131
• 802.1p to Queue Mapping on page 132
• DSCP to Queue Mapping on page 133
Basic CoS Configuration
Use the Trust Mode Configuration page to set the class of service trust mode of an interface.
Each port in the switch can be configured to trust one of the packet fields (802.1p or IP
DSCP), or to not trust any packet’s priority designation (untrusted mode). If the port is set to a
trusted mode, it uses a mapping table appropriate for the trusted field being used. This
mapping table indicates the CoS queue to which the packet should be forwarded on the
appropriate egress port(s). Of course, the trusted field must exist in the packet for the
mapping table to be of any use, so there are default actions performed when this is not the
case. These actions involve directing the packet to a specific CoS level configured for the
ingress port as a whole, based on the existing port default priority as mapped to a traffic class
by the current 802.1p mapping table.
Alternatively, when a port is configured as untrusted, it does not trust any incoming packet
priority designation and uses the port default priority value instead. All packets arriving at the
ingress of an untrusted port are directed to a specific CoS queue on the appropriate egress
port(s), in accordance with the configured default priority of the ingress port. This process is
also used for cases where a trusted port mapping is unable to be honored, such as when a
non-IP packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP DSCP value.
To display the Basic CoS Configuration page, click QoS Basic CoS Configuration.
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 129
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure global CoS settings:
1. Select the Global radio button to configure the trust mode settings that apply to all
interfaces.
Alternatively, you can select the Interface radio button to apply trust mode settings to
individual interfaces. The per-interface setting overrides the global settings.
2. Select the trust mode for all interfaces (Global Trust Mode) or the selected interface
(Interface Trust Mode). This setting determines the type of CoS marking to trust when the
frame enters the port.
• Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.
• 802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7. The
QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of four internal
hardware priority queues: High, Normal, Low, and Lowest.
• DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
4. If you change any of the settings on the page, click Apply to send the updated configuration
to the switch.
CoS Interface Configuration
Use the CoS Interface Configuration page to apply an interface shaping rate to all interfaces
or to a specific interface.
To display the CoS Interface Configuration page, click the QoS CoS tab, and then click the
Advanced CoS Interface Configuration link.
130 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure CoS settings for an interface:
1. To configure CoS settings for a physical port, click PORTS.
2. To configure CoS settings for a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), click LAGS.
3. To configure CoS settings for both physical ports and LAGs, click ALL.
4. Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure. You can select multiple ports and
LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces.
5. From the Interface Trust Mode field, specify whether or not the selected interface(s) trust a
particular packet marking when the packet enters the port.
• Untrusted. Do not trust any CoS packet marking at ingress.
• 802.1p. The eight priority tags that are specified in IEEE 802.1p are p0 to p7. The
QoS setting lets you map each of the eight priority levels to one of four internal
hardware priority queues: High, Normal, Low, and Lowest.
• DSCP. The six most significant bits of the DiffServ field are called the Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) bits.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
7. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 131
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Interface Queue Configuration
Use the Interface Queue Configuration page to define what a particular queue does by
configuring switch egress queues. User-configurable parameters control the amount of
bandwidth used by the queue, the queue depth during times of congestion, and the
scheduling of packet transmission from the set of all queues on a port. Each port has its own
CoS queue-related configuration.
The configuration process is simplified by allowing each CoS queue parameter to be
configured globally or per-port. A global configuration change is automatically applied to all
ports in the system.
To display the Interface Queue Configuration page, click the QoS CoS tab, and then click
the Advanced Interface Queue Configuration link.
To configure CoS queue settings for an interface:
1. To configure CoS queue settings for a physical port, click PORTS.
2. To configure CoS queue settings for a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), click LAGS.
3. To configure CoS queue settings for both physical ports and LAGs, click ALL.
4. Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure. You can select multiple ports and
LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces. Select the check box in the
heading row to apply a trust mode or rate to all interfaces.
5. Configure any of the following settings:
132 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Queue ID. Use the menu to select the queue to be configured.
• Minimum Bandwidth. Enter a percentage of the maximum negotiated bandwidth for
the selected queue on the interface. Specify a percentage from 0–100, in increments
of 1.
• Scheduler Type. Selects the type of queue processing from the drop down menu.
Options are Weighted and Strict. Defining on a per-queue basis allows the user to
create the desired service characteristics for different types of traffic.
• Weighted: Weighted round robin associates a weight to each queue. This is the
default.
• Strict: Services traffic with the highest priority on a queue first.
• Queue Management Type. Displays the type of packet management used for all
packets, which is Taildrop. All packets on a queue are safe until congestion occurs. At
this point, any additional packets queued are dropped.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
7. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
802.1p to Queue Mapping
The 802.1p to Queue Mapping page also displays the Current 802.1p Priority Mapping table.
To display the 801.p to Queue Mapping page, click QoS CoS Advanced 802.1p to
Queue Mapping.
To map 802.1p priorities to queues:
1. Select the Global radio button to apply the same 802.1p priority mapping to all CoS
configurable interfaces or select the Interface radio button to apply 802.1p priority
mapping to on a per-interface basis.
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 133
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
If you map 802.1p priorities to individual interfaces, select the Interface radio button and
then select the interface from the drop-down menu. The interface settings override the
global settings for 802.1p priority mapping.
2. Select the queue to map to the predefined 802.1p priority values.
The 802.1p Priority row contains traffic class selectors for each of the eight 802.1p
priorities to be mapped. The priority goes from low (0) to high (3). For example, traffic with
a priority of 0 is for most data traffic and is sent using “best effort.” Traffic with a higher
priority, such as 3, might be time-sensitive traffic, such as voice or video.
The values in each drop down menu represent the traffic class. The traffic class is the
hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue position.
Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in higher queues to be sent.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
4. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
DSCP to Queue Mapping
Use the DSCP to Queue Mapping page to specify which internal traffic class to map the
corresponding DSCP value.
To display the IP DSCP Mapping page, click QoS CoS Advanced DSCP to Queue
Mapping.
134 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To map DSCP values to queues:
1. For each DSCP value, select a hardware queue to associate with the value.
The traffic class is the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a
higher queue position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in
higher queues to be sent. Valid range is 0–3.
2. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
3. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 135
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Differentiated Services
The QoS feature contains Differentiated Services (DiffServ) support that allows traffic to be
classified into streams and given certain QoS treatment in accordance with defined per-hop
behaviors.
Standard IP-based networks are designed to provide “best effort” data delivery service. “Best
effort” service implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion, although there is
no guarantee that it will. During times of congestion, packets may be delayed, sent
sporadically, or dropped. For typical Internet applications, such as e-mail and file transfer, a
slight degradation in service is acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable. Conversely, any
degradation of service has undesirable effects on applications with strict timing requirements,
such as voice or multimedia.
Defining DiffServ
To use DiffServ for QoS, the Web pages accessible from the Differentiated Services menu
page must first be used to define the following categories and their criteria:
1. Class: Create classes and define class criteria.
2. Policy: Create policies, associate classes with policies, and define policy statements.
3. Service: Add a policy to an inbound interface
Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria. The classification criteria is
defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy's attributes. Policy attributes may be
defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match
occurs. A policy can contain multiples classes. When the policy is active, the actions taken
depend on which class matches the packet.
Packet processing begins by testing the class match criteria for a packet. A policy is applied
to a packet when a class match within that policy is found.
The Differentiated Services menu page contains links to the various Diffserv configuration
and display features.
To display the page, click QoS DiffServ. The Differentiated Services menu page contains
links to the following features:
• Diffserv Configuration
• Class Configuration
• Policy Configuration
• Service Configuration
• Service Statistics
136 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Diffserv Configuration
Use the Diffserv Configuration page to display DiffServ General Status Group information,
which includes the current administrative mode setting as well as the current and maximum
number of rows in each of the main DiffServ private MIB tables.
To display the page, click QoS DiffServ Advanced Diffserv Configuration.
To configure the global DiffServ mode:
1. Select the administrative mode for DiffServ:
• Enable. Differentiated Services are active.
• Disable. The DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed, but it is not
active.
2. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
3. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
The following table describes the information displayed in the Status table on the DiffServ
Configuration page:
Field Description
Class Table Displays the current and maximum number of rows of the class table.
Class Rule Table Displays the current and maximum number of rows of the class rule table.
Policy Table Displays the current and maximum number of rows of the policy table.
Policy Instance Table Displays the current and maximum number of rows of the policy instance table.
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 137
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Class Configuration
Use the Class Configuration page to add a new DiffServ class name, or to rename or delete
an existing class. The page also allows you to define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ
class. As packets are received, these DiffServ classes are used to prioritize packets. You can
have multiple match criteria in a class. The logic is a Boolean logical-and for this criteria. After
creating a Class, click the class link to the Class page.
To display the page, click QoS DiffServ Advanced Class Configuration.
To configure a DiffServ class:
1. To create a new class, enter a class name, select the class type, and click Add.
The switch supports only the Class Type value All, which means all the various match
criteria defined for the class should be satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical
AND of all the match criteria.
2. To rename an existing class, select the check box next to the configured class, update the
name, and click Apply.
3. To remove a class, click the check box beside the Class Name, then click Delete.
4. Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch. After creating a Class, click the class link to the Class page.
Policy Attributes Table Displays the current and maximum number of rows of the policy attributes table.
Service Table Displays the current and maximum number of rows of the service table.
Field Description
138 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure the class match criteria:
1. Click the class name for an existing class.
The class name is a hyperlink. The following figure shows the configuration fields for the
class.
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 139
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
2. Define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class:
• Reference Class. Selects a class to start referencing for criteria. A specified class
can reference at most one other class of the same type.
• Class of Service. Select the field and enter a class of service 802.1p user priority
value to be matched for the packets. The valid range is 0–7.
• VLAN. Select the field and enter a VLAN ID to be matched for packets. The VLAN ID
range is 1–4093.
• Protocol Type. Requires a packet’s layer 4 protocol to match the protocol you select.
If you select Other, enter a protocol number in the field that appears. The valid range
is 0–255.
• Source IP Address. Requires a packet’s source port IP address to match the
address listed here. In the IP Address field, enter a valid source IP address in dotted
decimal format.
• Source Mask. Enter a valid subnet mask to determine which bits in the IP address
are significant. Note that this is not a wildcard mask.
• Source L4 Port. Requires a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to match the port you
select. Select the desired L4 keyword from the list on which the rule can be based. If
you select Other, the screen refreshes and a Port ID field appears. Enter a
user-defined Port ID by which packets are matched to the rule.
140 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Destination IP Address. Requires a packet’s destination port IP address to match
the address listed here. In the IP Address field, enter a valid destination IP address in
dotted decimal format.
• Destination Mask. Enter a valid subnet mask to determine which bits in the IP
address are significant. This is not a wildcard mask.
• Destination L4 Port. Requires a packet’s TCP/UDP destination port to match the port
you select. Select the desired L4 keyword from the list on which the rule can be
based. If you select Other, the screen refreshes and a Port ID field appears. Enter a
user-defined Port ID by which packets are matched to the rule.
• IP DSCP. Matches the packet’s DSCP to the class criteria’s when selected. Select the
DSCP type from the menu or enter a DSCP value to match. If you select Other, enter
a custom value in the DSCP Value field that appears.
• IP Precedence. Matches the packet’s IP Precedence value to the class criteria’s
when Enter a value in the range of 0–7.
• IP ToS. Matches the packet’s Type of Service bits in the IP header to the class
criteria’s when selected and a value is entered. In the ToS Bits field, enter a two-digit
hexadecimal number to match the bits in a packet’s ToS field. In the ToS Mask field,
specify the bit positions that are used for comparison against the IP ToS field in a
packet.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
4. If you change any of the settings on the page, click Apply to send the updated configuration
to the switch. Configuration changes occur immediately.
5. Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
Policy Configuration
Use the Policy Configuration page to associate a collection of classes with one or more policy
statements. After creating a Policy, click the policy link to the Policy page.
To display the page, click QoS DiffServ Advanced Policy Configuration.
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 141
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure a DiffServ policy:
1. To create a new policy, enter a policy name in the Policy Selector field, select the
existing DiffServ class to associate with the policy, and click Add.
The available policy type is In, which indicates the type is specific to inbound traffic. This
field is not configurable.
2. To rename an existing policy or add a new member class to the policy, select the check box
next to the configured class, update the fields, and click Apply.
3. To remove a policy, click the check box beside the policy, then click Delete.
4. Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch. After creating a Class, click the class link to the Class page.
To configure the policy attributes:
1. Click the name of the policy.
142 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The policy name is a hyperlink. The following figure shows the configuration fields for the
policy.
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 143
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
2. Select the queue to which packets will of this policy-class will be assigned.
3. Configure the policy attributes:.
• Drop. Select this option to drop packets for this policy-class.
• Mark CoS. Enter the specified Class of Service queue number to mark all packets for
the associated traffic stream with the specified class of service value in the priority
field of the 802.1p header. If the packet does not already contain this header, one is
inserted. The CoS value is an integer from 0–7.
• Mark IP Precedence. Use this attribute to mark all packets for the associated traffic
stream with the IP Precedence value you enter in the IP Precedence Value field.
• Mark IP DSCP. Use this attribute to mark all packets for the associated traffic stream
with IP DSCP value you choose from the menu.
144 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Simple Policy. Use this attribute to establish the traffic policing style for the specified
class. The simple form of the policy command uses a single data rate and burst size,
resulting in two outcomes: confirm and violate.
4. If you select the Simple Policy attribute, you can configure the following fields:
• Color Mode. Color Aware mode requires the existence of one or more color classes
that are valid for use with this policy instance; otherwise, the color mode is color blind,
which is the default.
• Color Conform Class. A valid color class contains a single, non-excluded match
criterion for one of the following fields (provided the field does not conflict with the
classifier of the policy instance itself).
• Color Conform Mode. The match-criteria of the color Conform class.
• Committed Rate. The committed rate is specified in kilobits-per-second (Kbps) and is
an integer from 1–4294967295.
• Committed Burst Size. The committed burst size is specified in kilobytes (KB) and is
an integer from 1–128.
• Conform Action. Determines what happens to packets that are considered
conforming (below the police rate). Select one of the following actions:
• Send. (default) These packets are presented unmodified by DiffServ to the
system forwarding element.
• Drop. These packets are immediately dropped.
• Mark CoS. These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value
before being presented to the system forwarding element. This selection requires
that the Mark CoS value field be set.
• Mark IP Precedence. These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified IP
Precedence value before being presented to the system forwarding element. This
selection requires that the Mark IP Precedence value field be set.
• Mark IP DSCP. These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP
value before being presented to the system forwarding element. This selection
requires that the DSCP value field be set.
• Violate Action. Determines what happens to packets that are considered
non-conforming (above the police rate). Select one of the following actions:
• Send. (default) These packets are presented unmodified by DiffServ to the
system forwarding element.
• Drop. (default) These packets are immediately dropped.
• Mark CoS. These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value
before being presented to the system forwarding element. This selection requires
that the Mark CoS value field be set.
• Mark IP Precedence. These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified IP
Precedence value before being presented to the system forwarding element. This
selection requires that the Mark IP Precedence value field be set.
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 145
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Mark IP DSCP. These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP
value before being presented to the system forwarding element. This selection
requires that the DSCP value field be set.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
6. If you change any of the settings on the page, click Apply to send the updated configuration
to the switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.
7. Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
Service Configuration
Use the Service Configuration page to activate a policy on an interface.
To display the page, click QoS DiffServ Advanced Service Configuration.
To configure DiffServ policy settings on an interface:
1. To configure DiffServ policy settings for a physical port, click PORTS.
2. To configure DiffServ policy settings for a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), click LAGS.
3. To configure DiffServ policy settings for both physical ports and LAGs, click ALL.
146 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
4. Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure. You can select multiple ports and
LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces. Select the check box in the
heading row to apply the same settings to all interfaces.
5. To activate a policy for the selected interface(s) select the policy from the Policy In menu,
and then click Apply.
6. To remove a policy from the selected interface(s) select None from the Policy In menu, and
then click Apply.
7. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Service Statistics
Use the Service Statistics page to display service-level statistical information about all
interfaces that have DiffServ policies attached.
To display the page, click the QoS DiffServ tab and then click the Advanced Service
Statistics link.
The following table describes the information available on the Service Statistics page.
Field Description
Interface Displays the interface for which service statistics are to display.
Direction Displays the direction of packets for which service statistics display, which is always In.
Policy Name Displays the policy associated with the selected interface.
Operational Status Displays the operational status of this service interface, which is either Up or Down.
Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service | 147
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to update the page with the most current information.
Discarded Packets Displays the total number of packets discarded for all class instances in this service
policy for any reason due to DiffServ treatment. This is the overall count per-interface,
per-direction.
Member Classes Selects the member class for which octet statistics are to display.
Field Description
148 | Chapter 4: Configuring Quality of Service
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 149
5. Managing Device Security 5
Use the features available from the Security tab to configure management security settings for
port, user, and server security. The Security tab contains links to the following features:
• Management Security Settings on page 150
• Configuring Management Access on page 161
• Port Authentication on page 168
• Traffic Control on page 174
• Configuring Access Control Lists on page 183
150 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Management Security Settings
From the Management Security Settings page, you can configure the login password,
Remote Authorization Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) settings, Terminal Access Controller
Access Control System (TACACS+) settings, and authentication lists.
To display the page, click the Security Management Security tab. The Management
Security folder contains links to the following features:
• Change Password on page 150
• RADIUS Configuration on page 151
• Configuring TACACS+ on page 156
• Authentication List Configuration on page 159
Change Password
Use the page to change the login password. To display the page, click Security
Management Security User Configuration Change Password.
To change the login password for the management interface:
1. Specify the current password in the Old Password. The entered password will be
displayed in asterisks (*). Passwords are 1–20 alphanumeric characters in length and
are case sensitive.
2. Enter the new password. It will not display as it is typed, and only asterisks (*) will show on
the screen. Passwords are 1–20 alphanumeric characters in length and are case sensitive.
3. To confirm the password, enter it again to make sure you entered it correctly. This field will
not display, but will show asterisks (*)
4. Use the Reset Password field to reset the password to the default value.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
6. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 151
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Note: In the case of a lost password, press the Factory Default Reset
button on the front panel for more than one second to restore the
factory default. The reset button will only reboot the device.
RADIUS Configuration
RADIUS servers provide additional security for networks. The RADIUS server maintains a
user database, which contains per-user authentication information. The switch passes
information to the configured RADIUS server, which can authenticate a user name and
password before authorizing use of the network. RADIUS servers provide a centralized
authentication method for:
• Web Access
• Access Control Port (802.1X)
The RADIUS folder contains links to the following features:
• Global Configuration on page 151
• RADIUS Server Configuration on page 152
• Accounting Server Configuration on page 154
Global Configuration
Use the RADIUS Configuration page to add information about one or more RADIUS servers
on the network.
To access the RADIUS Configuration page, click Security Management Security
RADIUS Global Configuration.
The Current Server IP Address field is blank if no servers are configured (see RADIUS
Server Configuration on page 152). The switch supports up to three configured RADIUS
servers. If more than one RADIUS servers are configured, the current server is the server
152 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
configured as the primary server. If no servers are configured as the primary server, the
current server is the most recently added RADIUS server.
To configure global RADIUS server settings:
1. In the Max Number of Retransmits field, specify the value of the maximum number of
times a request packet is retransmitted to the RADIUS server.
Consideration to maximum delay time should be given when configuring RADIUS max
retransmit and RADIUS timeout. If multiple RADIUS servers are configured, the max
retransmit value on each will be exhausted before the next server is attempted. A
retransmit will not occur until the configured timeout value on that server has passed
without a response from the RADIUS server. Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving
a response from the RADIUS application equals the sum of (retransmit times timeout) for
all configured servers. If the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt, all
user interfaces will be blocked until the RADIUS application returns a response.
2. In the Timeout Duration field, specify the timeout value, in seconds, for request
retransmissions.
Consideration to maximum delay time should be given when configuring RADIUS max
retransmit and RADIUS timeout. If multiple RADIUS servers are configured, the max
retransmit value on each will be exhausted before the next server is attempted. A
retransmit will not occur until the configured timeout value on that server has passed
without a response from the RADIUS server. Therefore, the maximum delay in receiving
a response from the RADIUS application equals the sum of (retransmit times timeout) for
all configured servers. If the RADIUS request was generated by a user login attempt, all
user interfaces will be blocked until the RADIUS application returns a response.
3. From the Accounting Mode menu, select whether the RADIUS accounting mode is
enabled or disabled on the current server.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
RADIUS Server Configuration
Use the RADIUS Server Configuration page to view and configure various settings for the
current RADIUS server configured on the system.
To access the RADIUS Server Configuration page, click Security Management Security,
and then click the RADIUS Server Configuration link.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 153
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure a RADIUS server:
1. To add a RADIUS server, specify the settings the following list describes, and click Add.
• In the Server Address field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS server to add.
• In the Authentication Port field, specify the UDP port number the server uses to
verify the RADIUS server authentication. The valid range is 0–65535.
• From the Secret Configured menu, select Yes to add a RADIUS secret in the next
field. You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add
the RADIUS server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server has
been configured.
• In the Secret field, type the shared secret text string used for authenticating and
encrypting all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS server.
This secret must match the RADIUS encryption.
• From the Active menu, specify whether the server is a Primary or Secondary server.
• From the Message Authenticator menu, enable or disable the message
authenticator attribute for the selected server.
2. To modify settings for a RADIUS server that is already configured on the switch, select the
check box next to the server address, update the desired fields, and click Apply.
3. Click Refresh to update the page with the most current information.
4. To delete a configured RADIUS server, select the check box next to the server address, and
then click Delete.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
The following table describes the RADIUS server statistics available on the page.
Field Description
Server Address This displays all configured RADIUS servers.
Round Trip Time The time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most recent
Access-Reply/Access-Challenge and the Access-Request that matched it
from this RADIUS authentication server.
154 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions:
• Click Clear Counters to clear the authentication server and RADIUS statistics to their
default values.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
Accounting Server Configuration
Use the RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration page to view and configure various
settings for one or more RADIUS accounting servers on the network.
To access the RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration page, click Security Management
Security RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration.
Access Requests The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets sent to this server. This
number does not include retransmissions.
Access Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets retransmitted to this
server.
Access Accepts The number of RADIUS Access-Accept packets, including both valid and
invalid packets, that were received from this server.
Access Rejects The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets, including both valid and
invalid packets, that were received from this server.
Access Challenges The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge packets, including both valid and
invalid packets, that were received from this server.
Malformed Access
Responses
The number of malformed RADIUS Access-Response packets received
from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length.
Bad authenticators or signature attributes or unknown types are not included
as malformed access-responses.
Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets containing invalid
authenticators or signature attributes received from this server.
Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets destined for this server
that have not yet timed out or received a response.
Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to this server.
Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from
this server on the authentication port.
Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the
authentication port and dropped for some other reason.
Field Description
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 155
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure the RADIUS accounting server:
1. In the Accounting Server Address field, specify the IP address of the RADIUS
accounting server to add.
2. In the Port field, specify the UDP port number the server uses to verify the RADIUS
accounting server authentication. The valid range is 0–65535.
3. From the Secret Configured menu, select Yes to add a RADIUS secret in the next field.
You must select Yes before you can configure the RADIUS secret. After you add the
RADIUS accounting server, this field indicates whether the shared secret for this server has
been configured.
4. In the Secret field, type the shared secret to use with the specified accounting server.
5. From the Accounting Mode menu, enable or disable the RADIUS accounting mode.
6. Click Apply to update the switch with the RADIUS Accounting server settings.
7. To delete a configured RADIUS Accounting server, click Delete.
8. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
156 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table describes RADIUS accounting server statistics available on the page.
Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions:
• Click Clear Counters to reset all statistics to their default value.
• Click Refresh to update the page with the most current information.
Configuring TACACS+
TACACS+ provides a centralized user management system, while still retaining consistency
with RADIUS and other authentication processes. TACACS+ provides the following services:
• Authentication: Provides authentication during login and via user names and
user-defined passwords.
• Authorization: Performed at login. When the authentication session is completed, an
authorization session starts using the authenticated user name. The TACACS+ server
checks the user privileges.
Field Description
Accounting Server Address Displays the IP address of the supported RADIUS accounting server.
Round Trip Time (secs) Displays the time interval, in hundredths of a second, between the most
recent Accounting-Response and the Accounting-Request that matched it
from this RADIUS accounting server.
Accounting Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent to this server.
This number does not include retransmissions.
Accounting Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets retransmitted to this
server.
Accounting Responses Displays the number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port
from this server.
Malformed Accounting
Responses
Displays the number of malformed RADIUS Accounting-Response packets
received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid
length. Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as
malformed accounting responses.
Bad Authenticators Displays the number of RADIUS Accounting-Response packets that
contained invalid authenticators received from this accounting server.
Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets destined for this server
that have not yet timed out or received a response.
Timeouts The number of accounting timeouts to this server.
Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from
this server on the accounting port.
Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets received from this server on the accounting
port and dropped for some other reason.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 157
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The TACACS+ protocol ensures network security through encrypted protocol exchanges
between the device and TACACS+ server.
The TACACS+ folder contains links to the following features:
• Configuring TACACS+ on page 156
• TACACS+ Server Configuration on page 157
TACACS+ Configuration
The TACACS+ Configuration page contains the TACACS+ settings for communication
between the switch and the TACACS+ server you configure via the inband management port.
To display the TACACS+ Configuration page, click Security Management Security, and
then click the TACACS+ TACACS+ Configuration link.
To configure global TACACS+ settings:
1. In the Key String field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+
communications between the GS716T or GS724T and the TACACS+ server. The valid
range is 0–128 characters. The key must match the key configured on the TACACS+
server.
2. In the Connection Timeout field, specify the maximum number of seconds allowed to
establish a TCP connection between the GS716T or GS724T and the TACACS+ server.
The valid range is 1–30 seconds.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
4. If you make any changes to the page, click Apply to apply the new settings to the system.
TACACS+ Server Configuration
Use the TACACS+ Server Configuration page to configure up to five TACACS+ servers with
which the switch can communicate.
To display the TACACS+ Server Configuration page, click Security Management Security,
and then click the TACACS+ Server Configuration link.
158 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure TACACS+ server settings:
1. To add a new TACACS+ server, select Add from the TACACS+ Server field, enter the
IP address of the server to add, and click Apply.
Note: The Add option is available if fewer than five TACACS+ servers are
configured on the system, and the Server Address field is only
available when Add is selected in the TACACS+ Server IP Address
field.
After you add one or more TACACS+ servers, additional fields appear on the TACACS+
Server Configuration page.
2. In the Priority field, specify the order in which the TACACS+ servers are used. A value of 0
is the highest priority.
3. In the Port field, specify the authentication port number through which the TACACS+
session occurs. The default is port 49, and the range is 0–65535.
4. In the Key String field, specify the authentication and encryption key for TACACS+
communications between the GS716T or GS724T and the TACACS+ server. This key must
match the encryption used on the TACACS+ server. The valid range is 0–128 characters.
5. In the Connection Timeout field, specify the amount of time that passes before the
connection between the device and the TACACS+ server times out. The field range is from
1 to 30 seconds.
6. If you make changes to the page, or add a new entry, click Apply to apply the changes to
the system.
7. To delete a configured TACACS+ server, select the IP address of the server from the
TACACS+ Server drop down menu, and then click Delete.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 159
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Authentication List Configuration
Use the Authentication List page to configure the default login list. A login list specifies one or
more authentication methods to validate switch or port access for the admin user.
Note: Admin is the only user on the system and is assigned to a
preconfigured list named defaultList, which you cannot delete.
To access the Authentication List page, click Security Management Security, and then
click the Authentication List link.
To change the authentication method for the defaultList:
1. Select the check box next to the defaultList name
2. Use the drop down menu in the 1 column to select the authentication method that should
appear first in the selected authentication login list. If you select a method that does not time
out as the first method, such as ‘local’, no other method will be tried, even if you have
specified more than one method. This parameter will not appear when you first create a new
login list. User authentication occurs in the order the methods are selected. Possible
methods are as follows:
• Local: The user's locally stored ID and password will be used for authentication.
Since the local method does not time out, if you select this option as the first method,
no other method will be tried, even if you have specified more than one method.
• RADIUS: The user's ID and password will be authenticated using the RADIUS server.
If you select RADIUS or TACACS+ as the first method and an error occurs during the
authentication, the switch uses Method 2 to authenticate the user.
• TACACS+: The user's ID and password will be authenticated using the TACACS+
server. If you select RADIUS or TACACS+ as the first method and an error occurs
during the authentication, the switch attempts user authentication Method 2.
• None: The authentication method is unspecified. This option is only available for
Method 2 and Method 3.
160 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
3. Use the menu in the 2 column to select the authentication method, if any, that should appear
second in the selected authentication login list. This is the method that will be used if the first
method times out. If you select a method that does not time out as the second method, the
third method will not be tried. This parameter will not appear when you first create a new
login list.
4. Use the menu in the 3 column to select the authentication method, if any, that should appear
third in the selected authentication login list. This parameter will not appear when you first
create a new login list.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
6. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 161
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Configuring Management Access
From the Access page, you can configure HTTP and Secure HTTP access to the GS716T or
GS724T management interface. You can also configure Access Control Profiles and Access
Rules.
The Security Access tab contains the following folders:
• HTTP Configuration on page 161
• Secure HTTP Configuration on page 162
• Certificate Download on page 163
• Access Profile Configuration on page 165
• Access Rule Configuration on page 166
HTTP Configuration
Use the HTTP Configuration page to configure the HTTP server settings on the system.
To access the HTTP Configuration page, click the Security tab, then click Access, and then
click the HTTP HTTP Configuration link.
To configure the HTTP server settings:
1. Enable or disable the Web Java Mode. This applies to both secure and un-secure HTTP
connections. The currently configured value is shown when the Web page is displayed.
The default value is Enable.
2. In the HTTP Session Soft Timeout field, specify the number of minutes an HTTP session
can be idle before a timeout occurs.
After the session is inactive for the configured amount of time, the administrator is
automatically logged out and must re-enter the password to access the management
interface. A value of zero corresponds to an infinite timeout. The default value is 5
minutes. The currently configured value is shown when the Web page is displayed.
3. In the HTTP Session Hard Timeout field, specify the hard timeout for HTTP sessions.
162 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
This timeout is unaffected by the activity level of the session. The value must be in the
range of (0–168) hours. A value of zero corresponds to an infinite timeout. The default
value is 24 hours. The currently configured value is shown when the Web page is
displayed.
4. In the Maximum Number of HTTP Sessions field, specify the maximum number of HTTP
sessions that can exist at the same time. The value must be in the range of (0–16). The
default value is 16. The currently configured value is shown when the Web page is
displayed.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
6. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
Secure HTTP Configuration
Secure HTTP enables the transmission of HTTP over an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) connection. When you manage the switch by using a
Web interface, secure HTTP can help ensure that communication between the management
system and the switch is protected from eavesdroppers and man-in-the-middle attacks.
Use the Secure HTTP Configuration page to configure the settings for HTTPS
communication between the management station and the switch.
To display the Secure HTTP Configuration page, click Security Access, and then click the
HTTPS HTTPS Configuration link.
To configure HTTPS settings:
1. Use the radio buttons in the HTTPS Admin Mode field to enable or disable the
Administrative Mode of Secure HTTP.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 163
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The currently configured value is shown when the Web page is displayed. The default
value is Disable. You can only download SSL certificates when the HTTPS Admin mode
is disabled.
2. Use the radio buttons in the SSL Version 3 field to enable or disable Secure Sockets Layer
Version 3.0. The currently configured value is shown when the Web page is displayed. The
default value is Enable.
3. Use the radio buttons in the TLS Version 1 field to enable or disable Transport Layer
Security Version 1.0. The currently configured value is shown when the Web page is
displayed. The default value is Enable.
4. In the HTTPS Port field, specify the TCP port to use for HTTPS data. The value must be in
the range of 1–65535. Port 443 is the default value. The currently configured value is shown
when the Web page is displayed.
5. In the HTTPS Session Soft Timeout field, specify the number of minutes an HTTPS
session can be idle before a timeout occurs.
After the session is inactive for the configured amount of time, the administrator is
automatically logged out and must re-enter the password to access the management
interface. A value of zero corresponds to an infinite timeout. The default value is 5
minutes. The currently configured value is shown when the Web page is displayed.
6. In the HTTPS Session Hard Timeout field, specify the number of hours an HTTPS session
can remain active, regardless of session activity. The value must be in the range of (1–168)
hours. The default value is 24 hours. The currently configured value is shown when the Web
page is displayed.
7. In the Maximum Number of HTTPS Sessions field, specify the maximum number of
HTTPS sessions that can be open at the same time. The value must be in the range of
(0–2). The default value is 2. The currently configured value is shown when the Web page is
displayed.
8. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
9. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
Certificate Download
For the Web server on the switch to accept HTTPS connections from a management station,
the Web server needs a public key certificate. You can generate a certificate externally (for
example, off-line) and download it to the switch.
To display the Certificate Download page, click Security Access, and then click the HTTPS
Certificate Download link.
Downloading SSL Certificates
Before you download a file to the switch, the following conditions must be true:
• The file to download from the TFTP server is on the server in the appropriate directory.
• The file is in the correct format.
• The switch has a path to the TFTP server.
164 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure the certificate download settings for HTTPS sessions:
1. From the File Type menu, select the type of SSL certificate to download, which can be
one of the following:
• SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File. SSL Trusted Root Certificate File (PEM
Encoded).
• SSL Server Certificate PEM File. SSL Server Certificate File (PEM Encoded).
• SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File. SSL Diffie-Hellman Weak
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).
• SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File. SSL Diffie-Hellman Strong
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).
2. In the TFTP Server IP field, specify the address of the TFTP server. The address can be an
IP address in standard x.x.x.x format or a hostname. The hostname must start with a letter
of the alphabet. Make sure that the software image or other file to be downloaded is
available on the TFTP server.
3. In the Remote File Name field, specify the name of the file to download, including the path.
You may enter up to 32 characters.
4. Select the Start File Transfer check box.
5. Click Apply to start the transfer. A status message displays during the transfer and upon
successful completion of the transfer.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 165
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Access Profile Configuration
Use the Access Profile Configuration page to configure settings that control management
access to the switch. Access profile configuration requires three steps:
1. Use the Access Profile Configuration page to create an access profile. To add rules to
the profile, the access profile must be deactivated, which is the default setting.
2. Use the Access Rule Configuration page to add one or more access rules to the profile.
3. Return to the Access Profile Configuration page to activate the profile.
To access the Access Profile Configuration page, click Security Access, and then click the
Access Control Access Profile Configuration link.
To configure an Access Profile:
1. In the Access Profile Name field, specify the name of the access profile to be added.
The maximum length is 32 characters.
2. To activate an access profile, select the Activate Profile check box. You cannot add rules to
an active profile.
3. To deactivate an access profile, select the Deactivate Profile check box.
4. To remove an access profile, select the Remove Profile check box. The access profile
should be deactivated before removing the access profile.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
6. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
166 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The Profile Summary table shows the rules that are configured for the profile, as the following
table describes.
Click Refresh to update the page with the most current information.
Access Rule Configuration
Use the Access Rule Configuration page to configure the rules about what systems can
access the GS716T or GS724T Web interface and what protocols are allowed.
To access the Access Rule Configuration page, click Security Access, and then click the
Access Control Access Rule Configuration link.
Before you create access rules, make sure:
• An access profile exists.
• The access profile is deactivated.
Field Description
Rule Type Identifies the action the rule takes, which is either Permit or Deny.
Service Type Displays the type of service to allow or prohibit from accessing the switch
management interface:
• SNMP
• HTTP
• HTTPS
Source IP Address Displays the IP Address of the client that may or may not originate
management traffic.
Mask Displays the subnet mask associated with the IP address.
Priority Displays the priority of the rule. The rules are validated against the incoming
management request in the ascending order of their priorities. If a rule
matches, action is performed and subsequent rules below are ignored.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 167
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure access profile rules:
1. To add an access profile rule, configure the following settings and click Add.
• Rule Type: Specify whether the rule permits or denies access to the GS716T or
GS724T management interface.
• Select Permit to allow access to the management interface for traffic that meets
the criteria you configure for the rule. Any traffic that does not meet the rules is
denied.
• Select Deny to prohibit access to the management interface for traffic that meets
the criteria you configure for the rule. Any traffic that does not meet the rules is
allowed access to the switch. Unlike MAC ACLs and IP ACLs, there is no implied
deny all rule at the end of the rule list.
• Service Type. Select the type of service to allow or prohibit from accessing the switch
management interface:
• SNMP
• HTTP
• HTTPS
• Source IP Address. Specify the IP Address of the client originating the management
traffic.
• Mask. Specify the subnet mask associated with the IP address. The subnet mask is a
standard subnet mask, and not an inverse (wildcard) mask that you use with IP ACLs.
• Priority. Configure priority to the rule. The rules are validated against the incoming
management request in the ascending order of their priorities. If a rule matches,
action is performed and subsequent rules below are ignored. For example, if a
Source IP 10.10.10.10 is configured with priority 1 to permit, and Source IP
10.10.10.10 is configured with priority 2 to Deny, then access is permitted if the profile
is active, and the second rule is ignored.
2. To modify an access rule, select the check box next to the Rule Type, update the desired
settings, and click Apply
3. To delete an access rule, select the check box next to the Rule Type, and click Delete.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
168 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Port Authentication
In port-based authentication mode, when 802.1X is enabled globally and on the port,
successful authentication of any one supplicant attached to the port results in all users being
able to use the port without restrictions. At any given time, only one supplicant is allowed to
attempt authentication on a port in this mode. Ports in this mode are under bidirectional
control. This is the default authentication mode.
The 802.1X network has three components:
• Authenticators: Specifies the port that is authenticated before permitting system access.
• Supplicants: Specifies the host connected to the authenticated port requesting access to
the system services.
• Authentication Server: Specifies the external server, for example, the RADIUS server
that performs the authentication on behalf of the authenticator, and indicates whether the
user is authorized to access system services.
From the Port Authentication link, you can access the following pages:
• Basic:
• 802.1X Configuration on page 168
• Advanced:
• Port Authentication on page 169
• Port Summary on page 173
802.1X Configuration
Use the 802.1X Configuration page to enable or disable port access control on the system.
To display the 802.1X Configuration page, click Security Port Authentication Basic
802.1X Configuration.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 169
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure global 802.1X settings:
1. Select the appropriate radio button in the Port Based Authentication State field to
enable or disable 802.1X administrative mode on the switch.
• Enable. Port-based authentication is permitted on the switch.
Note: If 802.1X is enabled, authentication is performed by a RADIUS
server. This means the primary authentication method must be
RADIUS. To set the method, go to Security > Management
Security > Authentication List and select RADIUS as method 1 for
defaultList. For more information, see Authentication List
Configuration on page 159.
• Disable. The switch does not check for 802.1X authentication before allowing traffic
on any ports, even if the ports are configured to allow only authenticated users.
2. Select the appropriate radio button in the Guest VLAN field to enable or disable the guest
VLAN supplicant mode.
• Enabled. When no 802.1X supplicant is authenticated on a port, the port still provides
limited network access, as determined by a guest VLAN configured on the
authentication server.
• Disabled. A guest VLAN cannot be used for unauthorized ports.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
4. If you change the settings, click Apply to apply the new settings to the system.
Port Authentication
Use the Port Authentication page to enable and configure port access control on one or more
ports.
To access the Port Authentication page, click Security Port Authentication, and then click
the Advanced Port Authentication link.
Note: Use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the browser to view all
the fields on the Port Authentication page. The figures on the
following page are both images of the Port Authentication page.
170 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure 802.1X settings for the port:
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 171
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
1. Select the check box next to the port to configure. You can also select multiple check
boxes to apply the same settings to the select ports, or select the check box in the
heading row to apply the same settings to all ports.
2. For the selected port(s), specify the following settings:
• Port Control. Defines the port authorization state. The control mode is only set if the
link status of the port is link up. The possible field values are:
• Auto: Automatically detects the mode of the interface.
• Authorized: Places the interface into an authorized state without being
authenticated. The interface sends and receives normal traffic without client
port-based authentication.
• Unauthorized: Denies the selected interface system access by moving the
interface into unauthorized state. The switch cannot provide authentication
services to the client through the interface.
• Guest VLAN ID. This field allows the user to configure the Guest VLAN ID on the
interface. The valid range is 0–4093.The default value is 0. Enter 0 to reset the Guest
VLAN ID on the interface.
• Guest VLAN Period. This input field allows the user to enter the Guest VLAN period
for the selected port. The Guest VLAN period is the value, in seconds, of the timer
used by the Guest VLAN Authentication. The Guest VLAN timeout must be a value in
the range of 1–300. The default value is 90.
• Periodic Reauthentication. Use this field to enable or disable reauthentication of the
supplicant for the specified port. Select Enable and Disable. If the value is Enable,
reauthentication will occur. Otherwise, reauthentication will not be allowed. The
default value is Disable. Changing the selection will not change the configuration until
the Apply button is pressed.
• Reauthentication Period. Indicates the time span in which the selected port is
reauthenticated. The field value is in seconds. The range is 1–65535, and the field
default is 3600 seconds.
• Quiet Period. Defines the amount of time that the switch remains in the quiet state
following a failed authentication exchange. The possible field range is 0–65535. The
field value is in seconds. The field default is 60 seconds.
• Resending EAP. This input field allows you to configure the transmit period for the
selected port. The transmit period is the value, in seconds, of the timer used by the
authenticator state machine on the specified port to determine when to send an
EAPOL EAP Request/Identify frame to the supplicant. The transmit period must be a
number in the range of 1–65535. The default value is 30. Changing the value will not
change the configuration until you click the Apply button.
• Max EAP Requests. This input field allows you to enter the maximum requests for
the selected port. The maximum requests value is the maximum number of times the
authenticator state machine on this port will retransmit an EAPOL EAP
Request/Identity before timing out the supplicant. The maximum requests value must
be in the range of 1–10. The default value is 2. Changing the value will not change the
configuration until you click the Apply button.
172 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Supplicant Timeout. Defines the amount of time that lapses before EAP requests
are resent to the user. The field value is in seconds. The field default is 30 seconds.
• Server Timeout. Defines the amount of time that lapses before the switch resends a
request to the authentication server. The field value is in seconds. The range is
1–65535, and the field default is 30 seconds.
• Control Direction. This displays the control direction for the specified port, which is
always Both. The control direction dictates the degree to which protocol exchanges
take place between Supplicant and Authenticator.The unauthorized controlled port
exerts control over communication in both directions (disabling both incoming and
outgoing frames). This field is not configurable.
• Protocol Version. This field displays the protocol version associated with the
selected port. The only possible value is 1, corresponding to the first version of the
802.1X specification. This field is not configurable.
• PAE Capabilities. This field displays the port access entity (PAE) functionality of the
selected port. Possible values are Authenticator or Supplicant. This field is not
configurable.
• Authenticator PAE State. This field displays the current state of the authenticator
PAE state machine. Possible values are as follows:
• Initialize
• Disconnected
• Connecting
• Authenticating
• Authenticated
• Aborting
• Held
• ForceAuthorized
• ForceUnauthorized
• Backend State. This field displays the current state of the backend authentication
state machine. Possible values are as follows:
• Request
• Response
• Success
• Fail
• Timeout
• Initialize
• Idle
• EAPOL Flood Mode. This field is used to enable or disable the EAPOL Flood mode
per Interface.The default value is Disable.
3. Click Apply to send the updated screen to the switch and cause the changes to occur on
the switch and the changes will be saved.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 173
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
4. Click Initialize to begin the initialization sequence on the selected port(s). This button is only
selectable if the control mode is auto. If the button is not selectable, it will be grayed out.
When this button is clicked, the action is immediate. It is not required to click Apply for the
action to occur.
5. Click Reauthenticate to begin the reauthentication sequence on the selected port. This
button is only selectable if the control mode is auto. If the button is not selectable, it will be
grayed out. When this button is pressed, the action is immediate. It is not required to click
Apply for the action to occur.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Port Summary
Use the Port Summary page to view information about the port access control settings on a
specific port.
To access the Port Summary page, click Security Port Authentication Advanced Port
Summary.
174 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table describes the fields on the Port Summary page.
Click Refresh to update the information on the screen.
Traffic Control
From the Traffic Control link, you can configure MAC Filters, Storm Control, Port Security,
and Protected Port settings. To display the page, click the Security Traffic Control tab.
The Traffic Control folder contains links to the following features:
• MAC Filter:
• MAC Filter Configuration on page 175
• MAC Filter Summary on page 176
• Storm Control on page 177
• Port Security:
• Port Security Configuration on page 178
• Port Security Interface Configuration on page 179
Field Description
Port The port whose settings are displayed in the current table row.
Control Mode Defines the port authorization state. The control mode is only set if the link
status of the port is link up. The possible field values are:
• Auto: Automatically detects the mode of the interface.
• Force Authorized: Places the interface into an authorized state without
being authenticated. The interface sends and receives normal traffic
without client port-based authentication.
• Force Unauthorized: Denies the selected interface system access by
moving the interface into unauthorized state. The switch cannot provide
authentication services to the client through the interface.
Operating Control Mode This field indicates the control mode under which the port is actually
operating. Possible values are:
• ForceUnauthorized
• ForceAuthorized
• Auto
• N/A: If the port is in detached state it cannot participate in port access
control.
Reauthentication Enabled Displays if reauthentication is enabled on the selected port. This is a
configurable field. The possible values are true and false. If the value is true,
reauthentication will occur. Otherwise, reauthentication will not be allowed.
Port Status This field displays the authorization status of the specified port. The possible
values are Authorized, Unauthorized, and N/A. If the port is in detached
state, the value will be N/A since the port cannot participate in port access
control.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 175
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Security MAC Address on page 181
• Protected Ports Membership on page 181
MAC Filter Configuration
Use the MAC Filter Configuration page to create MAC filters that limit the traffic allowed into
and out of specified ports on the system.
To display the MAC Filter Configuration page, click Security Traffic Control, and then click
the MAC Filter MAC Filter Configuration link.
To configure MAC filter settings:
1. To configure a new MAC filter:
a. Select Create Filter from the MAC Filter menu. If no filters have been configured, this
is the only option available.
b. From the VLAN ID menu, select the VLAN to use with the MAC address to fully
identify packets you want filtered. You can change this field only when the Create
Filter option is selected from the MAC Filter menu.
c. In the MAC Address field, specify the MAC address of the filter in the format
00:01:1A:B2:53:4D. You can change this field when you have selected the Create
Filter option.
You cannot define filters for the following MAC addresses:
• 00:00:00:00:00:00
• 01:80:C2:00:00:00 to 01:80:C2:00:00:0F
• 01:80:C2:00:00:20 to 01:80:C2:00:00:21
• FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
d. Click the orange bar under the Source Port Members heading to display the
available ports. Select the port(s) to include in the inbound filter. If a packet with the
MAC address and VLAN ID you specify is received on a port that is not in the list, it
will be dropped.
176 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
e. Click the orange bar under the Destination Port Members heading to display the
available ports. Select the port(s) to include in the outbound filter. Packets with the
MAC address and VLAN ID you selected will be transmitted only out of ports that are
in the list. Destination ports can be included only in the Multicast filter.
2. To delete a configured MAC Filter, select it from the menu, and then click Delete.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
4. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
MAC Filter Summary
Use the MAC Filter Summary page to view the MAC filters that are configured on the system.
To display the MAC Filter Summary page, click Security Traffic Control, and then click the
MAC Filter MAC Filter Summary link.
The following table describes the information displayed on the page:
Click Refresh to update the page with the most current information.
Field Description
MAC Address Identifies the MAC address that is filtered.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID used with the MAC address to fully identify packets you want filtered.
You can only change this field when you have selected the Create Filter option.
Source Port Members Displays the ports included in the inbound filter.
Destination Port
Members
Displays the ports included in the outbound filter.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 177
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Storm Control
A broadcast storm is the result of an excessive number of broadcast messages
simultaneously transmitted across a network by a single port. Forwarded message
responses can overload network resources and/or cause the network to time out.
The switch measures the incoming broadcast/multicast/unknown unicast packet rate per port
and discards packets when the rate exceeds the defined value. Storm control is enabled per
interface, by defining the packet type and the rate at which the packets are transmitted.
To display the Storm Control page, click Security Traffic Control, and then click the Storm
Control link.
To configure storm control settings:
1. Select the check box next to the port to configure. Select multiple check boxes to apply
the same setting to all selected ports. Select the check box in the heading row to apply
the same settings to all ports.
2. From the Ingress Control Mode menu, select the mode of broadcast affected by storm
control.
178 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Disable. Do not use storm control.
• Unknown Unicast. If the rate of unknown L2 unicast (destination lookup failure)
traffic ingressing on an interface increases beyond the configured threshold, the traffic
will be dropped.
• Multicast. If the rate of L2 multicast traffic ingressing on an interface increases
beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped.
• Broadcast. If the rate of L2 broadcast traffic ingressing on an interface increases
beyond the configured threshold, the traffic will be dropped.
3. When the selected Ingress Control Mode is an option other than Disable, select Enable or
Disable from the Status menu to specify the administrative status of the mode.
4. In the Threshold field, specify the maximum rate at which unknown packets are forwarded.
The range is a percent of the total threshold between 0–100%. The default is 5%.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
6. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
Port Security Configuration
Use the Port Security feature to lock one or more ports on the system. When a port is locked,
only packets with an allowable source MAC addresses can be forwarded. All other packets
are discarded.
To display the Port Security Configuration page, click Security Traffic Control, and then
click the Port Security Port Security Configuration link.
To configure the global port security mode:
1. In the Port Security Mode field, select the appropriate radio button to enable or disable
port security on the switch.
2. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 179
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
3. If you change the mode, click Apply to apply the change to the system.
The Port Security Violation table shows information about violations that occurred on ports
that are enabled for port security. The following table describes the fields in the Port Security
Violation table.
Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
Port Security Interface Configuration
A MAC address can be defined as allowable by one of two methods: dynamically or statically.
Both methods are used concurrently when a port is locked.
Dynamic locking implements a first arrival mechanism for Port Security. You specify how
many addresses can be learned on the locked port. If the limit has not been reached, then a
packet with an unknown source MAC address is learned and forwarded normally. When the
limit is reached, no more addresses are learned on the port. Any packets with source MAC
addresses that were not already learned are discarded. You can effectively disable dynamic
locking by setting the number of allowable dynamic entries to zero.
Static locking allows you to specify a list of MAC addresses that are allowed on a port. The
behavior of packets is the same as for dynamic locking: only packets with an allowable
source MAC address can be forwarded.
To display the Port Security Interface Configuration page, click Security Traffic Control,
and then click the Port Security Interface Configuration link.
Field Description
Port Identifies the port where a violation occurred.
Last Violation MAC Displays the source MAC address of the last packet that was discarded at a
locked port.
VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID corresponding to the Last Violation MAC address.
180 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure port security settings:
1. To configure port security settings for a physical port, click PORTS.
2. To configure port security settings for a Link Aggregation Group (LAG), click LAGS.
3. To configure port security settings for both physical ports and LAGs, click ALL.
4. Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure. Select multiple check boxes to
apply the same setting to all selected interfaces. Select the check box in the heading row to
apply the same settings to all interfaces.
5. Specify the following settings:
• Port Security. Enable or Disable the port security feature for the selected port.
• Max Allowed Dynamically Learned MAC. Sets the maximum number of
dynamically learned MAC addresses on the selected interface. Valid range is 0–600.
• Max Allowed Statically Locked MAC. Sets the maximum number of statically locked
MAC addresses on the selected interface. Valid range is 0–20.
• Enable Violation Traps. Enables or disables the sending of new violation traps
designating when a packet with a disallowed MAC address is received on a locked
port.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 181
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
7. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
Security MAC Address
Use the Security MAC Address page to convert a dynamically learned MAC address to a
statically locked address.
To display the Security MAC Address page, click Security Traffic Control, and then click
the Port Security Security MAC Address link.
To convert learned MAC addresses:
1. Select the Convert Dynamic Address to Static check box.
2. Click Apply. The Dynamic MAC Address entries are converted to Static MAC address
entries in a numerically ascending order until the Static limit is reached.
The Dynamic MAC Address Table shows the MAC addresses and their associated VLANs
learned on the selected port. Use the Port List menu to select the interface for which you
want to display data.
Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
Protected Ports Membership
If a port is configured as protected, it does not forward traffic to any other protected port on
the switch, but it will forward traffic to unprotected ports. Use the Protected Ports Membership
page to configure the ports as protected or unprotected.
Field Description
VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID corresponding to the Last Violation MAC address.
MAC Address Displays the MAC addresses learned on a specific port.
182 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To display the Protected Ports Membership page, click the Security Traffic Control
Protected Ports link.
To configure protected ports:
1. Click the orange bar to display the available ports.
2. Click the box below each port to configure as a protected port. Protected ports are marked
with an X. No traffic forwarding is possible between two protected ports.
3. Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. If you make changes to the page, click Apply to apply the changes to the system.
Configuration changes take effect immediately.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 183
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Configuring Access Control Lists
Access Control Lists (ACLs) ensure that only authorized users have access to specific
resources while blocking off any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources. ACLs are
used to provide traffic flow control, restrict contents of routing updates, decide which types of
traffic are forwarded or blocked, and above all provide security for the network. switch
software supports IPv4 and MAC ACLs.
To configure an ACL, first create an IPv4-based or MAC-based ACL ID. Then, create a rule
and assign it to a unique ACL ID. Next, define the rules, which can identify protocols, source,
and destination IP and MAC addresses, and other packet-matching criteria. Finally, use the
ID number to assign the ACL to a port or to a LAG.
The Security ACL folder contains links to the following features:
• Basic:
• MAC ACL on page 184
• MAC Rules on page 186
• MAC Binding Configuration on page 188
• MAC Binding Table on page 189
• Advanced:
• IP ACL on page 190
• IP Rules on page 191
• IP Extended Rule on page 193
• IP Binding Configuration on page 196
• IP Binding Table on page 198
ACL Wizard
The ACL Wizard simplifies the ACL rule configuration process. The Wizard contains a short
list of access criteria that you can either permit or deny. When you select the permit or deny
link associated with the access criteria, you are redirected to a page that is automatically
configured with several of the settings.
Note: Before you use the ACL Wizard to configure rules, you must create either
a MAC ACL, Standard IP ACL, or Extended IP ACL that will contain
the rules. To create a MAC ACL, see MAC ACL on page 184. To
create a standard or extended IP ACL, see IP ACL on page 190.
To display the ACL Wizard page, click Security ACL.
184 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To use the ACL Wizard:
1. Determine the type of ACL to configure and create a MAC ACL, standard IP ACL, or
extended IP ACL.
• To permit or deny traffic based on the Source MAC Address, create a MAC ACL.
• To permit or deny traffic based on the Destination MAC Address, create a MAC ACL.
• To permit or deny traffic based on the Source IP Address, create a Standard ACL.
• To permit or deny traffic based on the Destination IP Address, create an Extended
ACL.
• To permit or deny traffic based on the TCP or UDP Source Port ID, create an
Extended ACL.
• To permit or deny traffic based on the TCP or UDP Destination Port ID, create an
Extended ACL.
2. Click the Permit or Deny link associated with the access criteria on the ACL Wizard page.
The switch redirects you to a page that contains the fields to configure the ACL rule, and
several of the fields are preconfigured. For example, if you select the Permit link
associated with the Select Devices Based on Source IP Address option, the Source IP
Address Rules page displays, and the only information you must provide is the source IP
address and source mask.
3. Configure the desired rule.
4. Click Apply to save the rule.
MAC ACL
A MAC ACL consists of a set of rules which are matched sequentially against a packet. When
a packet meets the match criteria of a rule, the specified rule action (Permit/Deny) is taken
and the additional rules are not checked for a match.
There are multiple steps involved in defining a MAC ACL and applying it to the switch:
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 185
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
1. Use the MAC ACL page to create the ACL ID.
2. Use the MAC Rules page to create rules for the ACL.
3. Use the MAC Binding Configuration page to assign the ACL by its ID number to a port.
4. Optionally, use the MAC Binding Table page to view the configurations.
To display the MAC ACL page, click Security ACL. The MAC ACL page is under the Basic
link.
The MAC ACL table displays the number of ACLs currently configured in the switch and the
maximum number of ACLs that can be configured. The current size is equal to the number of
configured IPv4 ACLs plus the number of configured MAC ACLs.
To configure a MAC ACL:
1. To add a MAC ACL, specify a name for the MAC ACL in the Name field, and click Add.
The name string may include alphabetic, numeric, dash, underscore, or space
characters only. The name must start with an alphabetic character.
Each configured ACL displays the following information:
• Rules. Displays the number of rules currently configured for the MAC ACL.
• Direction. Displays the direction of packet traffic affected by the MAC ACL, which can
be Inbound or blank.
2. To delete a MAC ACL, select the check box next to the Name field, then click Delete.
3. To change the name of a MAC ACL, select the check box next to the Name field, update the
name, then click Apply.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
186 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
MAC Rules
Use the MAC Rules page to define rules for MAC-based ACLs. The access list definition
includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or
discarded. A default 'deny all' rule is the last rule of every list.
To display the MAC Rules page, click Security ACL, then click the Basic MAC Rules link.
To configure MAC ACL rules:
1. From the ACL Name field, specify the existing MAC ACL to which the rule will apply. To
set up a new MAC ACL use the MAC ACL page.
2. To add a new rule, enter an ID for the rule, configure the following settings, and click Add.
• Action. Specify what action should be taken if a packet matches the rule's criteria:
• Permit: Forwards packets that meet the ACL criteria.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 187
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Deny: Drops packets that meet the ACL criteria.
• Assign Queue. Specifies the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all
packets matching this ACL rule. Enter an identifying number from 0–3 in this field.
• Redirect Interface. Specifies the specific egress interface where the matching traffic
stream is forced, bypassing any forwarding decision normally performed by the
device.
• Match Every. Requires a packet to match the criteria of this ACL. Select True or
False from the drop-down menu. Match Every is exclusive to the other filtering rules,
so if Match Every is True, the other rules on the screen are not available.
• CoS. Requires a packet’s class of service (CoS) to match the CoS value listed here.
Enter a CoS value between 0–7 to apply this criteria.
• Secondary CoS. Requires a packet’s secondary 802.1p priority value, which is the
dot1p value in the secondary (i.e. inner) tag of a double-tagged packet, to match the
value specified in this field.
• CPU Notification Mode. This field is configurable only when the action is denied.
• Enable. The switch to turn off PoE power to the port if the user is rejected by ACL.
When the rule is hit and the PoE component receives this notification, the PoE
component turns off PoE power for the port. To turn on the port power, you must
manually enable the PoE port Admin Mode.
• Disable: When a packet matches the ACL rule, the CPU is not notified, and the
port continues to provide power.
• Destination MAC. Requires an Ethernet frame’s destination port MAC address to
match the address listed here. Enter a MAC address in this field. The valid format is
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.
• Destination MAC Mask. If desired, enter the MAC Mask associated with the
Destination MAC to match. The MAC address mask specifies which bits in the
destination MAC to compare against an Ethernet frame. Use Fs and zeros in the MAC
mask, which is in a wildcard format. An F means that the bit is not checked, and a
zero in a bit position means that the data must equal the value given for that bit. For
example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff, and the mask is 00:00:ff:ff:ff:ff, all
MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result in a match (where x is any hexadecimal
number). A MAC mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 matches a single MAC address.
• EtherType Key. Requires a packet’s EtherType to match the EtherType you select.
Select the EtherType value from the drop down menu. If you select User Value, you
can enter a custom EtherType value.
• EtherType User Value. This field is configurable if you select User Value from the
EtherType drop down menu. The value you enter specifies a customized Ethertype to
compare against an Ethernet frame. The valid range of values is 0x0600–0xFFFF.
• Source MAC. Requires a packet’s source port MAC address to match the address
listed here. Enter a MAC address in the this field. The valid format is
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.
• Source MAC Mask. If desired, enter the MAC mask for the source MAC address to
match. Use Fs and zeros in the MAC mask, which is in a wildcard format. An F means
that the bit is not checked, and a zero in a bit position means that the data must equal
188 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
the value given for that bit. The valid format is xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. A MAC mask of
00:00:00:00:00:00 matches a single MAC address.
• VLAN. Requires a packet’s VLAN ID to match the ID listed here. Enter the VLAN ID to
apply this criteria. The valid range is 1–4093.
• Secondary VLAN. Requires a match on the value of the layer 2 secondary VLAN
Identifier field (the inner 802.1Q tag of a double-VLAN tagged packet). Enter the
secondary VLAN ID to apply this criteria.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
4. To delete a rule, select the check box associated with the rule and click Delete.
5. To change a rule, select the check box associated with the rule, change the desired fields
and click Apply.
MAC Binding Configuration
When an ACL is bound to an interface, all the rules that have been defined are applied to the
selected interface. Use the MAC Binding Configuration page to assign MAC ACL lists to ACL
Priorities and Interfaces.
To display the MAC Binding Configuration page, click Security ACL, then click the Basic
MAC Binding Configuration link.
To configure MAC ACL interface bindings:
1. Select an existing MAC ACL from the ACL ID menu.
The packet filtering direction for ACL is Inbound, which means the MAC ACL rules are
applied to traffic entering the port.
2. Specify an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list relative to other
access lists already assigned to this interface and direction.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 189
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
A low number indicates high precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use
for this interface and direction, the specified access list replaces the currently attached
access list using that sequence number. If the sequence number is not specified by the
user, a sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently
in use for this interface and direction will be used. The valid range is 1–4294967295.
3. Click the appropriate orange bar to expose the available ports or LAGs.
• To add the selected ACL to a port or LAG, click the box directly below the port or LAG
number so that an X appears in the box.
• To remove the selected ACL from a port or LAG, click the box directly below the port
or LAG number to clear the selection. An X in the box indicates that the ACL is
applied to the interface.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. Click Apply to save any changes to the running configuration.
MAC Binding Table
Use the MAC Binding Table page to view or delete the MAC ACL bindings.
To display the MAC Binding Table, click Security ACL, then click the Basic Binding Table
link.
190 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table describes the information displayed in the MAC Binding Table.
To delete a MAC ACL-to-interface binding, select the check box next to the interface and click
Delete.
IP ACL
IP ACLs allow network managers to define classification actions and rules for specific ingress
ports. Packets can be filtered on ingress (inbound) ports only. If the filter rules match, then
some actions can be taken, including dropping the packet or disabling the port. For example,
a network administrator defines an ACL rule that says port number 20 can receive TCP
packets. However, if a UDP packet is received the packet is dropped.
ACLs are composed of access control entries (ACE), or rules, that consist of the filters that
determine traffic classifications.
Use the IP ACL Configuration page to add or remove IP-based ACLs.
To display the IP ACL page, click Security ACL, then click the Advanced IP ACL link.
Field Description
Interface Displays the interface to which the MAC ACL is bound.
Direction Specifies the packet filtering direction for ACL. The only valid direction
is Inbound, which means the MAC ACL rules are applied to traffic
entering the port.
ACL Type Displays the type of ACL assigned to selected interface and direction.
ACL ID Displays the ACL Name identifying the ACL assigned to selected
interface and direction.
Sequence No Displays the Sequence Number signifying the order of specified ACL
relative to other ACLs assigned to selected interface and direction.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 191
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The IP ACL area shows the current size of the ACL table versus the maximum size of the
ACL table. The current size is equal to the number of configured IPv4 plus the number of
configured MAC ACLs. The maximum size is 100.
To configure an IP ACL:
1. In the IP ACL ID field, specify the ACL ID. The ID is an integer in the following range:
• 1–99: Creates an IP Standard ACL, which allows you to permit or deny traffic from a
source IP address.
• 100–199: Creates an IP Extended ACL, which allows you to permit or deny specific
types of layer 3 or layer 4 traffic from a source IP address to a destination IP address.
This type of ACL provides more granularity and filtering capabilities than the standard
IP ACL.
Each configured ACL displays the following information:
• Rules. Displays the number of rules currently configured for the IP ACL.
• Type. Identifies the ACL as either a standard or extended IP ACL.
2. To delete an IP ACL, select the check box next to the IP ACL ID field, then click Delete.
3. To change the name of an IP ACL, select the check box next to the IP ACL ID field, update
the name, then click Apply.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
IP Rules
Use the IP Rules page to define rules for IP-based standard ACLs. The access list definition
includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded normally or
discarded.
Note: There is an implicit “deny all” rule at the end of an ACL list. This
means that if an ACL is applied to a packet and if none of the explicit
rules match, then the final implicit “deny all” rule applies and the
packet is dropped.
To display the IP Rules page, click Security ACL, then click the Advanced IP Rules link.
192 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure rules for an IP ACL:
1. To add an IP ACL rule, select the ACL ID to add the rule to, complete the fields
described in the following list, and click Add.
• Rule ID. Specify a number from 1–10 to identify the IP ACL rule. You can create up to
10 rules for each ACL.
• Action. Selects the ACL forwarding action, which is one of the following:
• Permit. Forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria.
• Deny. Drops packets which meet the ACL criteria.
• Assign Queue ID. Specifies the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all
packets matching this ACL rule. Enter an identifying number from 0–3 in the
appropriate field.
• Match Every. Requires a packet to match the criteria of this ACL. Select True or
False from the drop down menu. Match Every is exclusive to the other filtering rules,
so if Match Every is True, the other rules on the screen are not available.
• CPU Notification Mode. This field is configurable only when the action is denied.
• Enable. The switch to turn off PoE power to the port if the user is rejected by ACL.
When the rule is hit and the PoE component receives this notification, the PoE
component turns off PoE power for the port. To turn on the port power, you must
manually enable the PoE port Admin Mode.
• Disable: When a packet matches the ACL rule, the CPU is not notified, and the
port continues to provide power.
• Source IP Address. Requires a packet’s source IP address to match the address
listed here. Type an IP Address in the appropriate field using dotted-decimal notation.
The address you enter is compared to a packet's source IP Address.
• Source IP Mask. Specifies the source IP address wildcard mask. Wild card masks
determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A wild card mask of
255.255.255.255 indicates that no bit is important. A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 indicates that
all of the bits are important. Wildcard masking for ACLs operates differently from a
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 193
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
subnet mask. A wildcard mask is in essence the inverse of a subnet mask. For
example, to apply the rule to all hosts in the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet, you type
0.0.0.255 in the Source IP Mask field. This field is required when you configure a
source IP address.
2. To delete an IP ACL rule, select the check box associated with the rule, and then click
Delete.
3. To update an IP ACL rule, select the check box associated with the rule, update the desired
fields, and then click Apply. You cannot modify the Rule ID of an existing IP rule.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. If you change any of the settings on the page, click Apply to send the updated configuration
to the switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.
IP Extended Rule
Use the IP Extended Rules page to define rules for IP-based extended ACLs. The access list
definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is forwarded
normally or discarded.
Note: There is an implicit “deny all” rule at the end of an ACL list. This
means that if an ACL is applied to a packet and if none of the explicit
rules match, then the final implicit “deny all” rule applies and the
packet is dropped.
To display the IP extended Rules page, click Security ACL, then click the Advanced IP
Extended Rules link. In the following figure, an extended IP ACL exists, and one rule has
been configured.
194 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure rules for an IP ACL:
1. To add an IP ACL rule to an extended IP ACL, select the ACL ID to add the rule to,
select the check box in the Extended ACL Rule table, and click Add.
Note: The ACL you select must have an ACL ID between 100 and 199.
The page displays the extended ACL Rule Configuration fields.
2. Configure the new rule.
• Rule ID. Specify a number from 1–10 to identify the IP ACL rule. You can create up to
10 rules for each ACL.
• Action. Selects the ACL forwarding action, which is one of the following:
• Permit. Forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria.
• Deny. Drops packets which meet the ACL criteria.
• Egress Queue. Specifies the hardware egress queue identifier used to handle all
packets matching this ACL rule. Enter an identifying number from 0–3 in the
appropriate field.
• Match Every. Requires a packet to match the criteria of this ACL. Select True or
False from the drop down menu. Match Every is exclusive to the other filtering rules,
so if Match Every is True, the other rules on the screen are not available.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 195
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Protocol Type. Requires a packet’s protocol to match the protocol listed here. Select
a type from the drop down menu or enter the protocol number in the available field.
• Src IP Address. Requires a packet’s source IP address to match the address listed
here. Type an IP Address in the appropriate field using dotted-decimal notation. The
address you enter is compared to a packet's source IP Address.
• Src IP Mask. Specifies the source IP address wildcard mask. Wild card masks
determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A wild card mask of
255.255.255.255 indicates that no bit is important. A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 indicates that
all of the bits are important. Wildcard masking for ACLs operates differently from a
subnet mask. A wildcard mask is in essence the inverse of a subnet mask. For
example, to apply the rule to all hosts in the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet, you type
0.0.0.255 in the Source IP Mask field. This field is required when you configure a
source IP address.
• Src L4 Port. Requires a packet’s TCP/UDP source port to match the port listed here.
Click Complete one of the following fields:
• Source L4 Keyword: Select the desired L4 keyword from a list of source ports on
which the rule can be based.
• Source L4 Port Number: If the source L4 keyword is Other, enter a user-defined
Port ID by which packets are matched to the rule.
• Dst IP Address. Requires a packet’s destination port IP address to match the
address listed here. Enter an IP Address in the appropriate field using dotted-decimal
notation. The address you enter is compared to a packet's destination IP Address.
• Dst IP Mask. Specifies the destination IP address wildcard mask. Wild card masks
determines which bits are used and which bits are ignored. A wild card mask of
255.255.255.255 indicates that no bit is important. A wildcard of 0.0.0.0 indicates that
all of the bits are important. Wildcard masking for ACLs operates differently from a
subnet mask. A wildcard mask is in essence the inverse of a subnet mask. For
example, to apply the rule to all hosts in the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet, you type
0.0.0.255 in the Source IP Mask field. This field is required when you configure a
source IP address.
• Dst L4 Port. Requires a packet’s TCP/UDP destination port to match the port listed
here. Complete one of the following fields:
• Destination L4 Keyword: Select the desired L4 keyword from a list of destination
ports on which the rule can be based.
• Destination L4 Port Number: If the destination L4 keyword is Other, enter a
user-defined Port ID by which packets are matched to the rule.
• Service Type. Choose one of the Service Type match conditions for the extended IP
ACL rule. The possible values are IP DSCP, IP precedence, and IP TOS, which are
alternative ways of specifying a match criterion for the same Service Type field in the
IP header, however each uses a different user notation. After you select the service
type, specify the value associated with the type.
• IP DSCP: Specify the IP DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value. The DSCP is defined
as the high-order six bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header. Select an IP
196 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
DSCP value from the menu. To specify a numeric value in the available field,
select Other from the menu and type an integer from 0 to 63 in the field.
• IP Precedence: The IP Precedence field in a packet is defined as the high-order
three bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header. This is an optional
configuration. Enter an integer from 0 to 7.
• IP TOS Bits: Matches on the Type of Service bits in the IP header when checked.
In the first TOS field, specify the two-digit hexadecimal TOS number. The second
field is for the TOS Mask, which specifies the bit positions that are used for
comparison against the IP TOS field in a packet. The TOS Mask value is a
two-digit hexadecimal number from 00 to ff, representing an inverted (i.e.
wildcard) mask. The zero-valued bits in the TOS Mask denote the bit positions in
the TOS Bits value that are used for comparison against the IP TOS field of a
packet. For example, to check for an IP TOS value having bits 7 and 5 set and bit
1 clear, where bit 7 is most significant, use a TOS Bits value of a0 and a TOS
Mask of 00.
3. To delete an IP ACL rule, select the check box associated with the rule, and then click
Delete.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. To modify an existing IP Extended ACL rule, click the Rule ID. The number is a hyperlink to
the Extended ACL Rule Configuration page. If the rule is Deny, you can specify the CPU
Notification Mode.
• Enable. The switch to turn off PoE power to the port if the user is rejected by ACL.
When the rule is hit and the PoE component receives this notification, the PoE
component turns off PoE power for the port. To turn on the port power, you must
manually enable the PoE port Admin Mode.
• Disable: When a packet matches the ACL rule, the CPU is not notified, and the port
continues to provide power.
6. If you modify the rule, click Apply to submit the changes to the switch.
IP Binding Configuration
When an ACL is bound to an interface, all the rules that have been defined are applied to the
selected interface. Use the IP Binding Configuration page to assign ACL lists to ACL
Priorities and Interfaces.
To display the IP Binding Configuration page, click Security ACL, then click the Advanced
IP Binding Configuration link.
Chapter 5: Managing Device Security | 197
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure IP ACL interface bindings:
1. Select an existing IP ACL from the ACL ID menu.
The packet filtering direction for ACL is Inbound, which means the IP ACL rules are
applied to traffic entering the port.
2. Specify an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list relative to other
access lists already assigned to this interface and direction.
A low number indicates high precedence order. If a sequence number is already in use
for this interface and direction, the specified access list replaces the currently attached
access list using that sequence number. If the sequence number is not specified by the
user, a sequence number that is one greater than the highest sequence number currently
in use for this interface and direction will be used. The valid range is 1–4294967295.
3. Click the appropriate orange bar to expose the available ports or LAGs.
• To add the selected ACL to a port or LAG, click the box directly below the port or LAG
number so that an X appears in the box.
• To remove the selected ACL from a port or LAG, click the box directly below the port
or LAG number to clear the selection. An X in the box indicates that the ACL is
applied to the interface.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
5. Click Apply to save any changes to the running configuration.
198 | Chapter 5: Managing Device Security
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
IP Binding Table
Use the IP Binding Table page to view or delete the IP ACL bindings.
To display the IP Binding Table, click Security ACL, then click the Advanced Binding
Table link.
The following table describes the information displayed in the MAC Binding Table.
To delete an IP ACL-to-interface binding, select the check box next to the interface and click
Delete.
Field Description
Interface Displays the interface to which the IP ACL is bound.
Direction Specifies the packet filtering direction for ACL. The only valid direction is
Inbound, which means the IP ACL rules are applied to traffic entering the
port.
ACL Type Displays the type of ACL assigned to selected interface and direction.
ACL ID Displays the ACL Number identifying the ACL assigned to selected interface
and direction.
Seq No. Displays the Sequence Number signifying the order of specified ACL relative
to other ACLs assigned to selected interface and direction.
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 199
6. Monitoring the System 6
Use the features available from the Monitoring tab to view a variety of information about the
switch and its ports and to configure how the switch monitors events. The Monitoring tab
contains links to the following features:
• Ports on page 200
• System Logs on page 213
• Port Mirroring on page 222
200 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Ports
The pages available from the Ports link contain a variety of information about the number and
type of traffic transmitted from and received on the switch. From the Ports link, you can
access the following pages:
• Switch Statistics on page 201
• Port Statistics on page 203
• Port Detailed Statistics on page 205
• EAP Statistics on page 211
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 201
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Switch Statistics
The Switch Statistics page displays detailed statistical information about the traffic the switch
handles.
To access the Switch Statistics page, click Monitoring Ports Switch Statistics.
The following table describes the Switch Statistics displayed on the screen.
Field Description
ifIndex This object indicates the ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with
the processor of this switch.
Octets Received The total number of octets of data received by the processor (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets).
Packets Received Without
Errors
The total number of packets (including broadcast packets and multicast
packets) received by the processor.
Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher layer
protocol.
202 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Multicast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to a multicast
address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast
address.
Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast
address. This does not include multicast packets.
Receive Packets Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded, even
though no errors had been detected, in order to prevent their being delivered
to a higher layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be
to free up buffer space.
Octets Transmitted The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing
characters.
Packets Transmitted Without
Errors
The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.
Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be
transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were
discarded or not sent.
Multicast Packets
Transmitted
The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be
transmitted to a Multicast address, including those that were discarded or
not sent.
Broadcast Packets
Transmitted
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted to the Broadcast address, including those that were discarded or
not sent.
Transmit Packets Discarded The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded, even
though no errors had been detected, in order to prevent their being delivered
to a higher layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be
to free up buffer space.
Most Address Entries Ever
Used
The highest number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries that
have been learned by this switch since the most recent reboot.
Address Entries in Use The number of Learned and static entries in the Forwarding Database
Address Table for this switch.
Maximum VLAN Entries The maximum number of Virtual LANs (VLANs) allowed on this switch.
Most VLAN Entries Ever
Used
The largest number of VLANs that have been active on this switch since the
last reboot.
Static VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been
created statically.
Dynamic VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch.
VLAN Deletes The number of VLANs on this switch that have been created and then
deleted since the last reboot.
Time Since Counters Last
Cleared
The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds, since the statistics
for this switch were last cleared.
Field Description
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 203
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions:
• Click Clear to clear all the statistics counters, resetting all switch summary and detailed
statistics to default values. The discarded packets count cannot be cleared.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
Port Statistics
The Port Statistics page displays a summary of per-port traffic statistics on the switch.
To access the Port Summary page, click Monitoring Ports, and then click the Port
Statistics link.
The following table describes the per-port statistics displayed on the screen.
Field Description
Interface Lists the ports on the system.
Total Packets Received
Without Errors
The total number of packets received that were without errors.
Packets Received With Error The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from
being deliverable to a higher layer protocol.
204 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions:
• To clear all the counters for all ports on the switch, select the check box in the row
heading and click Clear. The button resets all statistics for all ports to default values.
• To clear the counters for a specific port, select the check box associated with the port and
click Clear.
• Click Refresh to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current statistics.
Broadcast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the
broadcast address. This does not include multicast packets.
Packets Transmitted Without
Errors
The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment.
Transmit Packet Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of
errors.
Collision Frames The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
Time Since Counters Last
Cleared
The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the statistics
for this port were last cleared.
Field Description
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 205
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Port Detailed Statistics
The Port Detailed Statistics page displays a variety of per-port traffic statistics.
To access the Port Detailed page, click the Monitoring Ports tab, and then click Port
Detailed Statistics. (The Port Detailed Statistics figure shows some, but not all, of the fields
on the page.)
The following table describes the detailed port information displayed on the screen. To view
information about a different port, select the port number from the Interface menu.
Field Description
Interface Use the drop down menu to select the interface for which data is to be
displayed or configured.
MST ID Displays the created or existing MSTs.
ifIndex This field indicates the ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this
port on an adapter.
Port Type For most ports this field is blank. Otherwise the possible values are:
• Mirrored: Indicates that the port has been configured as a monitoring port
and is the source port in a port mirroring session. For additional
information about port monitoring and probe ports, see Multiple Port
Mirroring on page 222.
• Probe: Indicates that the port has been configured as a monitoring port
and is the destination port in a port mirroring session. For additional
information about port monitoring and probe ports, see Multiple Port
Mirroring on page 222.
• Port Channel: Indicates that the port has been configured as a member
of a port-channel, which is also known as a link Aggregation Group (LAG).
206 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Port Channel ID If the port is a member of a port channel, the port channel's interface ID and
name are shown. Otherwise, Disable is shown.
Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each
spanning tree. The port role will be one of the following values: Root Port,
Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master Port, or Disabled Port.
STP Mode Displays the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Administrative Mode for the port or
LAG. The possible values for this field are:
• Enable: Enables the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port.
• Disable: Disables the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port.
STP State Displays the port's current state Spanning Tree state. This state controls what
action a port takes on receipt of a frame. If the bridge detects a malfunctioning
port it will place that port into the broken state. The other five states are
defined in IEEE 802.1D:
• Disabled
• Blocking
• Listening
• Learning
• Forwarding
• Broken
Admin Mode Displays the port control administration state:
• Enable: The port can participate in the network (default).
• Disable: The port is administratively down and does not participate in the
network.
LACP Mode Selects the Link Aggregation Control Protocol administration state:
• Enable: Specifies that the port is allowed to participate in a port channel
(LAG), which is the default mode.
• Disable: Specifies that the port cannot participate in a port channel (LAG).
Physical Mode Indicates the port speed and duplex mode. In auto-negotiation mode, the
duplex mode and speed are set from the auto-negotiation process.
Physical Status Indicates the port speed and duplex mode status.
Link Status Indicates whether the link is up or down.
Link Trap This object determines whether or not to send a trap when link status
changes. The factory default is Enable.
• Enable: Specifies that the system sends a trap when the link status
changes.
• Disable: Specifies that the system does not send a trap when the link
status changes.
Packets RX and TX 64
Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted
that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets RX and TX 65-127
Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted
that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
Field Description
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 207
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Packets RX and TX
128-255 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted
that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
Packets RX and TX
256-511 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted
that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
Packets RX and TX
512-1023 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted
that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
Packets RX and TX
1024-1518 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted
that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
Packets RX and TX > 1522
Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received or transmitted
that are in excess of 1522 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Octets Received The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on
the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). This object can
be used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization. If greater precision is
desired, the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled
before and after a common interval.
Packets Received 64
Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets Received 65-127
Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets Received 128-255
Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets Received 256-511
Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets Received
512-1023 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets Received
1024-1518 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets Received > 1522
Octets
The total number of packets received that were in excess of 1522 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well
formed.
Total Packets Received
Without Errors
The total number of packets received that were without errors.
Field Description
208 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
Multicast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast
address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast
address.
Broadcast Packets
Received
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast
address. This does not include multicast packets.
Total Packets Received with
MAC Errors
The total number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them
from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
Jabbers Received The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). This definition of
jabber is different than the definition in IEEE-802.3 section 8.2.1.5 (10BASE5)
and section 10.3.1.4 (10BASE2). These documents define jabber as the
condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. The allowed range to detect
jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms.
Fragments Received The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length
with ERROR CRC (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Undersize Received The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length
with GOOD CRC (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Alignment Errors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits,
but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with a non-integral number of octets.
Rx FCS Errors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits,
but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets
Overruns The total number of frames discarded as this port was overloaded with
incoming packets, and could not keep up with the inflow.
Total Received Packets Not
Forwarded
A count of valid frames received which were discarded (i.e., filtered) by the
forwarding process.
Local Traffic Frames The total number of frames dropped in the forwarding process because the
destination address was located off of this port.
802.3x Pause Frames
Received
A count of MAC Control frames received on this interface with an opcode
indicating the PAUSE operation. This counter does not increment when the
interface is operating in half-duplex mode.
Unacceptable Frame Type The number of frames discarded from this port due to being an unacceptable
frame type.
Multicast Tree Viable
Discards
The number of frames discarded when a lookup in the multicast tree for a
VLAN occurs while that tree is being modified.
Field Description
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 209
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Reserved Address Discards The number of frames discarded that are destined to an IEEE 802.1 reserved
address and are not supported by the system.
Broadcast Storm Recovery The number of frames discarded that are destined for FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
when Broadcast Storm Recovery is enabled.
CFI Discards The number of frames discarded that have CFI bit set and the addresses in
RIF are in non-canonical format.
Upstream Threshold The number of frames discarded due to lack of cell descriptors available for
that packet's priority level.
Total Packets Transmitted
(Octets)
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted
on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). This object
can be used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization. If greater
precision is desired, the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should
be sampled before and after a common interval.
Packets Transmitted 64
Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets Transmitted
65-127 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were
between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets Transmitted
128-255 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were
between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets Transmitted
256-511 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were
between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets Transmitted
512-1023 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were
between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets Transmitted
1024-1518 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were
between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Packets Transmitted
1519-1522 Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were
between 1519 and 1522 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
Total Packets Transmitted
Successfully
The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment.
Unicast Packets
Transmitted
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were
discarded or not sent.
Multicast Packets
Transmitted
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted to a Multicast address, including those that were discarded or not
sent.
Field Description
210 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Broadcast Packets
Transmitted
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted to the Broadcast address, including those that were discarded or
not sent.
Total Transmit Errors The sum of Single, Multiple, and Excessive Collisions.
Tx FCS Errors The total number of packets transmitted that had a length (excluding framing
bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but
had a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets
Tx Oversized The total number of frames that exceeded the max permitted frame size. This
counter has a max increment rate of 815 counts per second at 10 Mb/s.
Underrun Errors The total number of frames discarded because the transmit FIFO buffer
became empty during frame transmission.
Total Transmit Packets
Discarded
The sum of single collision frames discarded, multiple collision frames
discarded, and excessive frames discarded.
Single Collision Frames A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular
interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.
Multiple Collision Frames A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular
interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.
Excessive Collision Frames A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to
excessive collisions.
Port Membership Discards The number of frames discarded on egress for this port due to egress filtering
being enabled.
STP BPDUs Received Number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port.
STP BPDUs Transmitted Number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.
RSTP BPDUs Received Number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.
RSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.
MSTP BPDUs Received Number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.
802.3x Pause Frames
Transmitted
A count of MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode
indicating the PAUSE operation. This counter does not increment when the
interface is operating in half-duplex mode.
EAPOL Frames Received The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by
this authenticator.
EAPOL Frames
Transmitted
The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this
authenticator.
Time Since Counters Last
Cleared
The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the statistics for
this port were last cleared.
Field Description
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 211
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions:
• Click Clear to clear all the counters. This resets all statistics for this port to the default
values.
• Click Refresh to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current statistics.
EAP Statistics
Use the EAP Statistics page to display information about EAP packets received on a specific
port.
To display the EAP Statistics page, click the Monitoring Ports tab, and then click the EAP
Statistics link.
212 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The following table describes the EAP statistics displayed on the screen.
Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions:
• To clear all the EAP counters for all ports on the switch, select the check box in the
row heading and click Clear. The button resets all statistics for all ports to default
values.
• To clear the counters for a specific port, select the check box associated with the port
and click Clear.
• Click Refresh to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current statistics.
Field Description
Ports Specifies the interface which is polled for statistics.
Frames Received Displays the number of valid EAPOL frames received on the port.
Frames Transmitted Displays the number of EAPOL frames transmitted through the port.
Start Frames Received Displays the number of EAPOL Start frames received on the port.
Logoff Frames Received Displays the number of EAPOL Log off frames that have been received on
the port.
Last Frame Version Displays the protocol version number attached to the most recently
received EAPOL frame.
Last Frame Source Displays the source MAC Address attached to the most recently received
EAPOL frame.
Invalid Frames Received Displays the number of unrecognized EAPOL frames received on this
port.
Length Error Frames Received Displays the number of EAPOL frames with an invalid Packet Body
Length received on this port.
Response/ID Frames Received Displays the number of EAP Respond ID frames that have been received
on the port.
Response Frames Received Displays the number of valid EAP Response frames received on the port.
Request/ID Frames
Transmitted
Displays the number of EAP Requested ID frames transmitted through the
port.
Request Frames Transmitted Displays the number of EAP Request frames transmitted through the port.
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 213
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
System Logs
The switch may generate messages in response to events, faults, or errors occurring on the
platform as well as changes in configuration or other occurrences. These messages are
stored locally and can be forwarded to one or more centralized points of collection for
monitoring purposes or long term archival storage. Local and remote configuration of the
logging capability includes filtering of messages logged or forwarded based on severity and
generating component.
The Monitoring Logs tab contains links to the following folders:
• Memory Logs on page 214
• FLASH Log Configuration on page 215
• Server Log Configuration on page 217
• Trap Logs on page 219
• Event Logs on page 220
214 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Memory Logs
The in-memory log stores messages in memory based upon the settings for message
component and severity. Use the Memory Logs page to set the administrative status and
behavior of logs in the system buffer. These log messages are cleared when the switch
reboots.
To access the Memory Log page, click the Monitoring Logs tab, and then click the
Memory Log link.
T o configure the Memory Log settings:
1. Use the radio buttons in the Admin Status field to determine whether to log messages.
• Enable: Enables system logging.
• Disable: Prevents the system from logging messages.
2. From the Behavior menu, specify the behavior of the log when it is full.
• Wrap: When the buffer is full, the oldest log messages are deleted as the system logs
new messages.
• Stop on Full: When the buffer is full, the system stops logging new messages and
preserves all existing log messages.
3. If you change the buffered log settings, click Apply to apply the changes to the system and
the changes will be saved.
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 215
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
The Memory Log table also appears on the Memory Log page.
The rest of the page displays the Memory Log messages. The format of the log message is
the same for messages that are displayed for the message log, persistent log, or console log.
Messages logged to a collector or relay via syslog have the same format as well.
The following example shows the standard format for a log message:
<14> Mar 24 05:34:05 10.131.12.183-1 UNKN[2176789276]:
main_login.c(179) 3855 %% HTTP Session 19 initiated for user admin
connected from 10.27.64.122
The number contained in the angle brackets represents the message priority, which is
derived from the following values:
Priority = (facility value × 8) + severity level.
The facility value is usually one, which means it is a user-level message. Therefore, to
determine the severity level of the message, subtract eight from the number in the angle
brackets. The example log message has a severity level of 6 (informational). For more
information about the severity of a log message, see the Severity Filter description on page
218.
The message was generated on March 24 at 5:34:05 a.m by the switch with an IP address of
10.131.12.183. The component that generated the message is unknown, but it came from
line 179 of the main_login.c file. This is the 3,855th message logged since the switch was last
booted. The message indicates that the administrator logged onto the HTTP management
interface from a host with an IP address of 10.27.64.122.
Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions:
• Click Clear to clear the messages out of the buffered log in the memory.
• Click Refresh to update the page with the latest messages in the log.
• Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen
to the latest value of the switch.
FLASH Log Configuration
The FLASH log is a log that is stored in persistent storage, which means that the log
messages are retained across a switch reboot.
• The first log type is the system startup log. The system startup log stores the first N
messages received after system reboot. This log always has the log full operation
attribute set to stop on full and can store up to 32 messages.
Field Description
Total Number of Messages Displays the number of messages the system has logged in memory.
Only the 64 most recent entries are displayed on the page.
216 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• The second log type is the system operation log. The system operation log stores the
last N messages received during system operation. This log always has the log full
operation attribute set to overwrite. This log can store up to 1000 messages.
Either the system startup log or the system operation log stores a message received by the
log subsystem that meets the storage criteria, but not both. On system startup, if the startup
log is configured, it stores messages up to its limit. The operation log, if configured, then
begins to store the messages.
Use the FLASH Log Configuration page to enable or disable persistent logging and to set the
severity filter.
To access the FLASH Log Configuration page, click the Monitoring Logs tab, and then
click the FLASH Log link.
To configure the FLASH Log settings:
1. Use the radio buttons in the Admin Status field to determine whether to log messages
to persistent storage.
• Enable: Enables persistent logging.
• Disable: Prevents the system from logging messages in persistent storage.
2. From the Severity Filter field, specify the type of log messages to record. A log records
messages equal to or above a configured severity threshold. For example, if you select
Error, the logged messages include Error, Critical, Alert, and Emergency. The default
severity level is Alert(1). The severity can be one of the following levels:
• Emergency (0): The highest level warning level. If the device is down or not
functioning properly, an emergency log is saved to the device.
• Alert (1): The second highest warning level. An alert log is saved if there is a serious
device malfunction, such as all device features being down. Action must be taken
immediately.
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 217
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Critical (2): The third highest warning level. A critical log is saved if a critical device
malfunction occurs, for example, two device ports are not functioning, while the rest of
the device ports remain functional.
• Error (3): A device error has occurred, such as if a port is offline.
• Warning (4): The lowest level of a device warning.
• Notice (5): Normal but significant conditions. Provides the network administrators
with device information.
• Info (6): Provides device information.
• Debug (7): Provides detailed information about the log. Debugging should only be
entered by qualified support personnel.
3. If you make any changes to the page, click Apply to apply the change to the system.
The rest of the page displays the number of persistent messages the system has logged and
the persistent log messages.
Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions:
• Click Clear to clear the messages out of the buffered log.
• Click Refresh to refresh the page with the most current data from the switch.
• Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen
to the latest value of the switch.
Server Log Configuration
Use the Server Log Configuration page to allow the switch to send log messages to the
remote logging hosts configured on the system.
To access the Server Log Configuration page, click the Monitoring Logs tab, and then
click the Server Log link.
218 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure local log server settings:
1. Use the radio buttons in the Admin Status field to determine whether to send log
messages to the remote syslog hosts configured on the switch.
• Enable: Messages will be sent to all configured hosts (syslog collectors or relays)
using the values configured for each host.
• Disable: Stops logging to all syslog hosts. Disable means no messages will be sent to
any collector/relay.
2. In the Local UDP Port field, specify the port on the switch from which syslog messages are
sent.
3. Click Apply to save the settings.
The Server Log Configuration area also displays the following information:
• The Messages Relayed field shows the number of messages forwarded by the syslog
function to a syslog host. Messages forwarded to multiple hosts are counted once
for each host.
• The Messages Ignored field shows the number of messages that were ignored.
To configure a remote log server
1. To add a remote syslog host (log server), specify the settings in the following list and
click Add.
• Host Address. Specify the IP address or hostname of the host configured for syslog.
• Port. Specify the port on the host to which syslog messages are sent. The default port
is 514.
• Severity Filter. Use the menu to select the severity of the logs to send to the logging
host. Logs with the selected severity level and all logs of greater severity are sent to
the host. For example, if you select Error, the logged messages include Error, Critical,
Alert, and Emergency. The default severity level is Alert(1). The severity can be one of
the following levels:
• Emergency (0): The highest level warning level. If the device is down or not
functioning properly, an emergency log is saved to the device.
• Alert (1): The second highest warning level. An alert log is saved if there is a
serious device malfunction, such as all device features being down.
• Critical (2): The third highest warning level. A critical log is saved if a critical device
malfunction occurs, for example, two device ports are not functioning, while the
rest of the device ports remain functional.
• Error (3): A device error has occurred, such as if a port is offline.
• Warning (4): The lowest level of a device warning.
• Notice (5): Provides the network administrators with device information.
• Informational (6): Provides device information.
• Debug (7): Provides detailed information about the log. Debugging should only be
entered by qualified support personnel.
2. To delete an existing host, select the check box next to the host and click Delete.
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 219
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
3. To modify the settings for an existing host, select the check box next to the host, change the
desired information, and click Apply.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
The Status field in the Server Configuration table shows whether the remote logging host is
currently active.
Trap Logs
Use the Trap Logs page to view information about the SNMP traps generated on the switch.
To access the Trap Logs page, click the Monitoring Logs tab, and then click the Trap Logs
link.
The following table describes the Trap Log information displayed on the screen.
The page also displays information about the traps that were sent.
Field Description
Number of Traps Since
Last Reset
The number of traps that have occurred since the switch last reboot.
Trap Log Capacity The maximum number of traps stored in the log. If the number of traps exceeds the
capacity, the entries will overwrite the oldest entries.
Number of Traps Since
Log Last Viewed
The number of traps that have occurred since the traps were last displayed.
Displaying the traps by any method (such as terminal interface display, Web
display, or upload file from switch) will cause this counter to be cleared to 0.
220 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Clear Counters to clear all the counters. This resets all statistics for the trap logs to the
default values.
Event Logs
Use the Event Log page to display the event log, which is used to hold error messages for
catastrophic events. After the event is logged and the updated log is saved in flash memory,
the switch will be reset. The log can hold at least 2,000 entries and is erased when an
attempt is made to add an entry after it is full. The event log is preserved across system
resets.
To access the Event Log page, click the Monitoring Logs tab, and then click the Event
Logs link.
The following table describes the Event Log information displayed on the screen.
Field Description
Log The sequence number of this trap.
System Up Time The time at which this trap occurred, expressed in days, hours, minutes, and
seconds since the last reboot of the switch.
Trap Information identifying the trap.
Field Description
Entry The number of the entry within the event log. The most recent entry is first.
Type Specifies the type of entry.
Filename The GS716T or GS724T source code filename identifying the code that
detected the event.
Line The line number within the source file of the code that detected the event.
Task ID The OS-assigned ID of the task reporting the event.
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 221
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Use the buttons at the bottom of the page to perform the following actions:
• Click Clear to clear the messages out of the Event Log.
• Click Refresh to refresh the data on the screen and display the most current information.
Code The event code passed to the event log handler by the code reporting the
event.
Time The time the event occurred, measured from the previous reset.
Field Description
222 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Port Mirroring
The page under the Mirroring link allows you to view and configure port mirroring on the
system.
Multiple Port Mirroring
Port mirroring selects the network traffic for analysis by a network analyzer. This is done for
specific ports of the switch. As such, many switch ports are configured as source ports and
one switch port is configured as a destination port. You have the ability to configure how
traffic is mirrored on a source port. Packets that are received on the source port, that are
transmitted on a port, or are both received and transmitted, can be mirrored to the destination
port.
The packet that is copied to the destination port is in the same format as the original packet
on the wire. This means that if the mirror is copying a received packet, the copied packet is
VLAN tagged or untagged as it was received on the source port. If the mirror is copying a
transmitted packet, the copied packet is VLAN tagged or untagged as it is being transmitted
on the source port.
Use the Multiple Port Mirroring page to define port mirroring sessions.
To access the Multiple Port Mirroring page, click Monitoring Port Mirroring.
Chapter 6: Monitoring the System | 223
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To configure Port Mirroring:
1. Select the check box next to a port to configure it as a source port.
2. In the Destination Port field, specify the port to which port traffic is be copied. Use the e1,
e2,...format to specify the port. You can configure only one destination port on the system.
3. From the Session Mode menu, select the mode for port mirroring on the selected port:
• Enable. Multiple Port Mirroring is active on the selected port.
• Disable. Port mirroring is not active on the selected port, but the mirroring information
is retained.
4. Click Apply to apply the settings to the system. If the port is configured as a source port, the
Mirroring Port field value is Mirrored.
5. To delete a mirrored port, select the check box next to the mirrored port, and then click
Delete.
6. Click Cancel to cancel the configuration on the screen and reset the data on the screen to
the latest value of the switch.
224 | Chapter 6: Monitoring the System
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Chapter 7: Maintenance | 225
7. Maintenance 7
Use the features available from the Maintenance tab to help you manage the switch. The
Maintenance tab contains links to the following features:
• Reset on page 226
• Upload File From Switch on page 228
• Download File To Switch on page 230
• File Management on page 234
• Troubleshooting on page 237
226 | Chapter 7: Maintenance
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Reset
The Reset menu contains links to the following options:
• Device Reboot on page 226
• Factory Default on page 226
Device Reboot
Use the Device Reboot page to reboot the GS716T or GS724T.
To access the Device Reboot page, click Maintenance Reset Device Reboot.
To reboot the switch:
1. Select the check box on the page.
2. Click Apply. The switch resets immediately. The management interface is not available until
the switch completes the boot cycle. After the switch resets, the login screen appears.
Factory Default
Use the Factory Default page to reset the system configuration to the factory default values.
Note: If you reset the switch to the default configuration, the IP address is
reset to 192.168.0.239, and the DHCP client is enabled. If you loose
network connectivity after you reset the switch to the factory
defaults, see Connecting the Switch to the Network on page 12 .
To access the Factory Defaults page, click Maintenance Reset Factory Default.
Chapter 7: Maintenance | 227
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To reset the switch to the factory default settings:
1. Select the check box on the page.
2. Click Apply. The switch resets immediately.
228 | Chapter 7: Maintenance
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Upload File From Switch
The switch supports system file uploads from the switch to a remote system by using TFTP.
Use the File Upload page to upload configuration (ASCII), log (ASCII), and image (binary)
files from the switch to an TFTP server on the network.
To display the File Upload page, click Maintenance Upload File Upload.
To upload a file from the switch to the TFTP server:
1. Use the File Type menu to specify the type of file you want to upload:
• Code: Uploads a stored code image.
• Text Configuration: Uploads the text configuration file, which can be used as a
backup copy or to download and apply to another switch.
• Error Log: Uploads the system error (persistent) log, sometimes referred to as the
event log.
• Buffered Log: Uploads the system buffered (in-memory) log.
• Trap Log: Uploads the system trap records.
2. If the file type is Code, specify whether to upload image1 or image2. This field is only visible
when Code is selected as the File Type.
3. From the Server Address Type filed, specify the format to use for the address you type in
the TFTP Server Address field:
• IPv4. Indicates the TFTP server address is an IP address in dotted-decimal format.
• DNS. Indicates the TFTP server address is a hostname.
4. In the Server Address field, specify the IP address or hostname of the TFTP server. The
address you type must be in the format indicated by the TFTP Server Address Type.
Chapter 7: Maintenance | 229
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
5. In the Transfer File Path field, specify the path on the TFTP server where you want to put
the file. You may enter up to 32 characters. Include the backslash at the end of the path. A
path name with a space is not accepted. Leave this field blank to save the file to the root
TFTP directory.
6. In the Transfer File Name field, specify a destination file name for the file to upload. You
may enter up to 32 characters. The transfer fails if you do not specify a file name. For a code
transfer, use an .stk file extension.
7. Select the Start File Transfer check box to initiate the file upload.
8. Click Apply to begin the file transfer.
The last row of the table displays information about the progress of the file transfer. The
page refreshes automatically until the file transfer completes or fails.
230 | Chapter 7: Maintenance
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Download File To Switch
The switch supports system file downloads from a remote system to the switch by using
either TFTP or HTTP.
The Download menu contains links to the following options:
• TFTP File Download on page 230
• HTTP File Download on page 232
TFTP File Download
Use the Download File to Switch page to download device software, the image file, the
configuration files and SSL files from a TFTP server to the switch.
You can also download files via HTTP. See HTTP File Download on page 232 for additional
information.
To access the TFTP File Download page, click Maintenance Download TFTP File
Download.
Before you download a file to the switch, the following conditions must be true:
• The file to download from the TFTP server is on the server in the appropriate directory.
• The file is in the correct format.
• The switch has a path to the TFTP server.
To download a file to the switch from a TFTP server:
1. From the File Type menu, Specify what type of file you want to download to the switch:
• Code: The code is the system software image, which is saved in one of two flash
sectors called images (image1 and image2). The active image stores the active copy;
Chapter 7: Maintenance | 231
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
while the other image stores a second copy. The device boots and runs from the
active image. If the active image is corrupt, the system automatically boots from the
non-active image. This is a safety feature for faults occurring during the boot upgrade
process.
• Text Configuration: A text-based configuration file enables you to edit a configured
text file (startup-config) offline as needed without having to translate the contents for
the switch to understand. The most common usage of text-based configuration is to
upload a working configuration from a device, edit it offline to personalize it for
another similar device (for example, change the device name, serial number, IP
address), and download it to that device.
• Boot Code: The boot code used to automatically boot the system.
• SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File: SSL Trusted Root Certificate File (PEM
Encoded).
• SSL Server Certificate PEM File: SSL Server Certificate File (PEM Encoded).
• SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File: SSL Diffie-Hellman Weak
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).
• SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File: SSL Diffie-Hellman Strong
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).
2. If you are downloading an GS716T or GS724T image (Code), select the image on the
switch to overwrite. This field is visible only when Code is selected as the File Type.
Note: It is recommended that you not overwrite the active image. The
system will display a warning that you are trying to overwrite the
active image.
3. From the Server Address Type filed, specify the format for the address you type in the
TFTP Server Address field
• IPv4. Indicates the TFTP server address is an IP address in dotted-decimal format.
• DNS. Indicates the TFTP server address is a hostname.
4. In the Server Address field, specify the IP address or hostname of the TFTP server. The
address you type must be in the format indicated by the TFTP Server Address Type.
5. In the Transfer File Path field, specify the path on the TFTP server where the file is located.
You may enter up to 32 characters. Include the backslash at the end of the path. A path
name with a space is not accepted. Leave this field blank to save the file to the root TFTP
directory.
6. In the Remote File Name field, specify the name of the file to download from the TFTP
server. You may enter up to 32 characters. A file name with a space is not accepted.
7. Select the Start File Transfer check box to initiate the file upload.
8. Click Apply to begin the file transfer.
The last row of the table displays information about the progress of the file transfer. The
page refreshes automatically until the file transfer completes or fails.
232 | Chapter 7: Maintenance
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
To activate a software image that you download to the switch, see File Management on
page 234.
HTTP File Download
Use the HTTP File Download page to download files of various types to the switch using an
HTTP session (for example, via your Web browser).
To display this page, click Maintenance Download HTTP File Download.
To download a file to the switch from by using HTTP:
1. From the File Type menu, Specify what type of file you want to download to the switch:
• Code: The code is the system software image, which is saved in one of two flash
sectors called images (image1 and image2). The active image stores the active copy;
while the other image stores a second copy. The device boots and runs from the
active image. If the active image is corrupt, the system automatically boots from the
non-active image. This is a safety feature for faults occurring during the boot upgrade
process.
• Text Configuration: A text-based configuration file enables you to edit a configured
text file (startup-config) offline as needed without having to translate the contents for
the switch to understand. The most common usage of text-based configuration is to
upload a working configuration from a device, edit it offline to personalize it for
another similar device (for example, change the device name, serial number, IP
address), and download it to that device.
• Boot Code: The boot code used to automatically boot the system.
• SSL Trusted Root Certificate PEM File: SSL Trusted Root Certificate File (PEM
Encoded).
• SSL Server Certificate PEM File: SSL Server Certificate File (PEM Encoded).
• SSL DH Weak Encryption Parameter PEM File: SSL Diffie-Hellman Weak
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).
Chapter 7: Maintenance | 233
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• SSL DH Strong Encryption Parameter PEM File: SSL Diffie-Hellman Strong
Encryption Parameter File (PEM Encoded).
2. If you are downloading an GS716T or GS724T image (Code), select the image on the
switch to overwrite. This field is only visible when Code is selected as the File Type.
Note: It is recommended that you not overwrite the active image. The
system will display a warning that you are trying to overwrite the
active image.
3. Click Browse to open a file upload window to locate the file you want to download.
4. Click Cancel to cancel the operation on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the
latest value of the switch.
5. Click the Apply button to initiate the file download.
Note: After a file transfer is started, please wait until the page refreshes.
When the page refreshes, the Select File option will be blanked out.
This indicates that the file transfer is done.
234 | Chapter 7: Maintenance
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
File Management
The system maintains two versions of the GS716T or GS724T software in permanent
storage. One image is the active image, and the second image is the backup image. The
active image is loaded during subsequent switch restarts. This feature reduces switch down
time when upgrading or downgrading the GS716T or GS724T software.
The File Management menu contains links to the following options:
• Dual Image Configuration on page 234
• Dual Image Status on page 235
Dual Image Configuration
The system running a legacy software version will ignore (not load) a configuration file
created by the newer software version. When a configuration file created by the newer
software version is discovered by the system running an older version of the software, the
system will display an appropriate warning to the user.
Use the Dual Image Configuration page to set the boot image, configure an image
description, or delete an image.
To display the Dual Image Configuration page, click Maintenance File Management Dual
Image Dual Image Configuration.
To configure Dual Image settings:
1. Select the image to configure.
The Current-active field displays the name of the active image.
2. To configure a descriptive name for the selected software image, type the name in the
Image Description field.
3. To set the selected image as the active image, select the Active Image check box.
Chapter 7: Maintenance | 235
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Note: After activating an image, you must perform a system reset of the
switch in order to run the new code.
4. To remove the selected image from permanent storage on the switch, select the Delete
Image check box. You cannot delete the active image.
5. Click Cancel to cancel the operation on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the
latest value of the switch.
6. Click Apply to apply the settings to the switch.
Dual Image Status
You can use the Dual Image Status page to view information about the system images on the
device.
To display the Dual Image Status page, click Maintenance > File Management Dual Image
Dual Image Status.
The following table describes the information on the Dual Image Status page.
Field Description
Unit The unit ID of the switch is always 1.
Image1 Ver Displays the version of the image1 code file.
Image2 Ver Displays the version of the image2 code file.
236 | Chapter 7: Maintenance
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Click Refresh to display the latest information from the switch.
For information about how to update or change the system images, see File Management on
page 234.
Current-active Displays the currently active image on this switch.
Next-active Displays the image to be used on the next restart of this switch.
Image1 Description Displays the description associated with the image1 code file.
Image2 Description Displays the description associated with the image2 code file.
Field Description
Chapter 7: Maintenance | 237
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Troubleshooting
The Troubleshooting menu contains links to the following options:
• Ping on page 237
• Traceroute on page 238
Ping
Use the Ping page to tell the switch to send a Ping request to a specified IP address. You can
use this feature to check whether the switch can communicate with a particular network host.
To access the Ping page, click Maintenance Troubleshooting Ping.
To configure the settings and ping a host on the network:
1. In the Hostname/IP Address field, specify the IP address or the hostname of the
station you want the switch to ping. The initial value is blank. This information is not
retained across a power cycle.
2. Optionally, configure the following settings:
• Count. Specify the number of pings to send. The valid range is 1–15.
• Interval. Specify the number of seconds between pings sent. The valid range is 1–60.
• Size. Specify the size of the ping (ICMP) packet to send. The valid range is 0–65507.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the operation on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the
latest value of the switch.
4. Click Apply to send the ping. The switch sends the number of pings specified in the Count
field, and the results are displayed below the configurable data in the Ping area.
238 | Chapter 7: Maintenance
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• If successful, you will see “Reply From IP/Host: icmp_seq = 0. time = xx usec. Tx = x,
Rx = x Min/Max/Avg RTT = x/x/x msec.”
• If a reply to the ping is not received, you will see “Reply From IP/Host: Destination
Unreachable. Tx = x, Rx = 0 Min/Max/Avg RTT = 0/0/0 msec”.
Traceroute
Use the Traceroute utility to discover the paths that a packet takes to a remote destination.
To display this page, click Maintenance Troubleshooting Traceroute.
To configure the Traceroute settings and send probe packets to discover the route to a host
on the network:
1. In the Hostname/IP Address field, specify the IP address or the hostname of the station
you want the switch to ping. The initial value is blank. This information is not retained
across a power cycle.
2. Optionally, configure the following settings:
• Probes Per Hop. Specify the number of times each hop should be probed. The valid
range is 1–10.
• MaxTTL. Specify the maximum time-to-live for a packet in number of hops. The valid
range is 1–255.
• InitTTL. Specify the initial time-to-live for a packet in number of hops. The valid range
is 0– 255.
Chapter 7: Maintenance | 239
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• MaxFail. Specify the maximum number of failures allowed in the session. The valid
range is 0–255.
• Interval. Specify the time between probes in seconds. The valid range is 1–60.
• Port. Specify the UDP destination port in probe packets. The valid range is 1–65535.
• Size. Specify the size of probe packets. The valid range is 0–65507.
3. Click Cancel to cancel the operation on the screen and reset the data on the screen to the
latest value of the switch.
4. Click Apply to initiate the traceroute. The results display in the TraceRoute area.
240 | Chapter 7: Maintenance
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Chapter 8: Help | 241
8. Help 8
Use the features available from the Help tab to connect to online resources for assistance. The
Help tab contains a link to Online Help.
Online Help
The Online Help includes the following pages:
• Support on page 241
• User Guide on page 242
Support
Use the Support page to connect to the Online Support site at netgear.com.
To access the Support page, click Help Support.
To connect to the NETGEAR support site for the GS716T or GS724T, click Apply.
242 | Chapter 8: Help
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
User Guide
Use the User Guide page to access the GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration
Manual (the guide you are now reading) that is available on the NETGEAR Website.
To access the User Guide page, click Help User Guide.
To access to the User Guide that is available online, click Apply.
Chapter 8: Help | 243
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Appendix A: Hardware Specifications and Default Values | 244
A. Hardware Specifications and
Default Values A
GS716T and GS724T Gigabit Smart Switches
Specifications
The GS716T and GS724T Gigabit Smart Switches conform to the TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP,
ICMP, TFTP, DHCP, IEEE 802.1D, IEEE 802.1p, and IEEE 802.1Q standards.
GS716T Specifications
GS724T Specifications
Feature Value
Interfaces 16 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
Flash memory size 16 MB
SRAM size and type 64 MB DDR
Feature Value
Interfaces 24 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
Two 1000M SFP Gigabit Ethernet ports
Flash memory size 16 MB
SRAM size and type 64 MB DDR
Appendix A: Hardware Specifications and Default Values | 245
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
GS716T and GS724T Switch Performance
GS716T and GS724T Switch Features and Defaults
Port Characteristics
Feature Value
Switching capacity Non-Blocking Full WireSpeed on all packet sizes
Forwarding method Store and Forward
Packet forwarding rate 10M:14,880 pps/
100M:148,810 pps/
1G:1,488,000 pps
MAC addresses 4K
Green Ethernet Power consumption savings by cable length (<10m)
Automatic power down on port when link is down
Feature Sets Supported Default
Auto negotiation/static
speed/duplex
All ports Auto negotiation
Auto MDI/MDIX N/A Enabled
802.3x flow control/back pressure 1 (per system) Disabled
Port mirroring 1 Disabled
Port trunking (aggregation) 2 for GS716T, 4 for GS724T Pre-configured
802.1D spanning tree 1 Disabled
802.1w RSTP 1 Disabled
802.1s spanning tree 3 instances Disabled
Static 802.1Q tagging 64 VID = 1
member ports = 16 (GS716T)
member ports = 24 (GS724T)
Learning process Supports Static and dynamic MAC
entries
Dynamic learning is enabled by
default
246 | Appendix A: Hardware Specifications and Default Values
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Traffic Control
Quality Of Service
Security
Feature Sets Supported Default
Storm control All ports Disabled
Jumbo frame All ports Disabled
Max = 9216 bytes
Feature Sets Supported Default
Number of queues 4 N/A
Port based N/A N/A
802.1p 1 Enabled
DSCP 1 Disabled
Rate limiting All ports Disabled
Auto-QoS All ports Disabled
Feature Sets Supported Default
802.1X All ports Disabled
MAC ACL 100 (Shared with IP ACL) All MAC addresses allowed
IP access list 100 (shared with MACACL) All IP addresses allowed
Password control access 1 Idle timeout = 5 mins.
Password = “password”
Management security 1 profile with 20 rules for
HTTP/HTTPS/SNMP access to
allow/deny an IP address/subnet
All IP addresses allowed
Port MAC lock down All ports Disabled
Appendix A: Hardware Specifications and Default Values | 247
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
System Setup
Management
Feature Sets Supported Default
Boot code update 1 N/A
DHCP/manual IP 1 DHCP enabled/192.168.0.239
Default gateway 1 192.168.0.254
System name configuration 1 NULL
Configuration save/restore 1 N/A
Firmware upgrade 1 N/A
Restore defaults 1 (Web and front-panel button) N/A
Dual image support 1 Enabled
Factory reset 1 N/A
Feature Sets Supported Default
Multi-session Web connections 16 Enabled
SNMPv1/V2c
SNMP v3
Max 5 community entries Enabled (read, read-write
communities)
Time control 1 (Local or SNTP) Local Time enabled
LLDP/LLDP-MED All ports Disabled
Logging 3 (Memory/Flash/Server) Memory Log enabled
MIB support 1 Disabled
Smart Control Center N/A Enabled
Statistics N/A N/A
248 | Appendix A: Hardware Specifications and Default Values
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Other Features
Feature Sets Supported Default
IGMP snooping v1/v2 All ports Disabled
Configurations upload/download 1 N/A
EAPoL flooding All ports Disabled
BPDU flooding All ports Disabled
Static multicast groups 8 Disabled
Filter multicast control 1 Disabled
Appendix B: Configuration Examples | 249
B. Configuration Examples B
This chapter contains information about how to configure the following features:
• Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) on page 250
• Access Control Lists (ACLs) on page 252
• Differentiated Services (DiffServ) on page 255
• 802.1X on page 260
• MSTP on page 263
250 | Appendix B: Configuration Examples
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs)
A local area network (LAN) can generally be defined as a broadcast domain. Hubs, bridges,
or switches in the same physical segment or segments connect all end node devices. End
nodes can communicate with each other without the need for a router. Routers connect LANs
together, routing the traffic to the appropriate port.
A virtual LAN (VLAN) is a local area network with a definition that maps workstations on some
basis other than geographic location (for example, by department, type of user, or primary
application). To enable traffic to flow between VLANs, traffic must go through a router, just as
if the VLANs were on two separate LANs.
A VLAN is a group of PCs, servers, and other network resources that behave as if they were
connected to a single network segment—even though they might not be. For example, all
marketing personnel might be spread throughout a building. Yet if they are all assigned to a
single VLAN, they can share resources and bandwidth as if they were connected to the same
segment. The resources of other departments can be invisible to the marketing VLAN
members, accessible to all, or accessible only to specified individuals, depending on how the
IT manager has set up the VLANs.
VLANs have a number of advantages:
• It is easy to do network segmentation. Users that communicate most frequently with each
other can be grouped into common VLANs, regardless of physical location. Each group’s
traffic is contained largely within the VLAN, reducing extraneous traffic and improving the
efficiency of the whole network.
• They are easy to manage. The addition of nodes, as well as moves and other changes,
can be dealt with quickly and conveniently from a management interface rather than from
the wiring closet.
• They provide increased performance. VLANs free up bandwidth by limiting node-to-node
and broadcast traffic throughout the network.
• They ensure enhanced network security. VLANs create virtual boundaries that can be
crossed only through a router. So standard, router-based security measures can be used
to restrict access to each VLAN.
Packets received by the switch are treated in the following way:
• When an untagged packet enters a port, it is automatically tagged with the port’s default
VLAN ID tag number. Each port has a default VLAN ID setting that is user configurable
(the default setting is 1). The default VLAN ID setting for each port can be changed in the
Port PVID Configuration screen. See Port VLAN ID Configuration on page 83.
• When a tagged packet enters a port, the tag for that packet is unaffected by the default
VLAN ID setting. The packet proceeds to the VLAN specified by its VLAN ID tag number.
• If the port through which the packet entered does not have membership with the VLAN
specified by the VLAN ID tag, the packet is dropped.
• If the port is a member of the VLAN specified by the packet’s VLAN ID, the packet can be
sent to other ports with the same VLAN ID.
Appendix B: Configuration Examples | 251
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Packets leaving the switch are either tagged or untagged, depending on the setting for
that port’s VLAN membership properties. A U for a given port means that packets leaving
the switch from that port are untagged. Inversely, a T for a given port means that packets
leaving the switch from that port are tagged with the VLAN ID that is associated with the
port.
The example given in this section comprises numerous steps to illustrate a wide range of
configurations to help provide an understanding of tagged VLANs.
VLAN Example Configuration
This example demonstrates several scenarios of VLAN use and describes how the switch
handles tagged and untagged traffic.
In this example, you create two new VLANs, change the port membership for default
VLAN 1, and assign port members to the two new VLANs:
1. In the Basic VLAN Configuration screen (see VLAN Configuration on page 80), create
the following VLANs:
• A VLAN with VLAN ID 10.
• A VLAN with VLAN ID 20.
2. In the VLAN Membership screen (see VLAN Membership Configuration on page 81)
specify the VLAN membership as follows:
• For the default VLAN with VLAN ID 1, specify the following members: port 7 (U) and
port 8 (U).
• For the VLAN with VLAN ID 10, specify the following members: port 1 (U), port 2 (U),
and port 3 (T).
• For the VLAN with VLAN ID 20, specify the following members: port 4 (U), port 5 (T),
and port 6 (U).
3. In the Port PVID Configuration screen (see Port VLAN ID Configuration on page 83),
specify the PVID for ports e1 and e4 so that packets entering these ports are tagged with the
port VLAN ID:
• Port e1: PVID 10
• Port e4: PVID 20
4. With the VLAN configuration that you set up, the following situations produce results as
described:
• If an untagged packet enters port 1, the switch tags it with VLAN ID 10. The packet
has access to port 2 and port 3. The outgoing packet is stripped of its tag to leave port
2 as an untagged packet. For port 3, the outgoing packet leaves as a tagged packet
with VLAN ID 10.
• If a tagged packet with VLAN ID 10 enters port 3, the packet has access to port 1 and
port 2. If the packet leaves port 1 or port 2, it is stripped of its tag to leave the switch
as an untagged packet.
• If an untagged packet enters port 4, the switch tags it with VLAN ID 20. The packet
has access to port 5 and port 6. The outgoing packet is stripped of its tag to become
an untagged packet as it leaves port 6. For port 5, the outgoing packet leaves as a
tagged packet with VLAN ID 20.
252 | Appendix B: Configuration Examples
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Access Control Lists (ACLs)
ACLs ensure that only authorized users have access to specific resources while blocking off
any unwarranted attempts to reach network resources.
ACLs are used to provide traffic flow control, restrict contents of routing updates, decide
which types of traffic are forwarded or blocked, and provide security for the network. ACLs
are normally used in firewall routers that are positioned between the internal network and an
external network, such as the Internet. They can also be used on a router positioned between
two parts of the network to control the traffic entering or exiting a specific part of the internal
network. The added packet processing required by the ACL feature does not affect switch
performance. That is, ACL processing occurs at wire speed.
Access lists are a sequential collection of permit and deny conditions. This collection of
conditions, known as the filtering criteria, is applied to each packet that is processed by the
switch or the router. The forwarding or dropping of a packet is based on whether or not the
packet matches the specified criteria.
Traffic filtering requires the following two basic steps:
1. Create an access list definition.
The access list definition includes rules that specify whether traffic matching the criteria is
forwarded normally or discarded. Additionally, you can assign traffic that matches the
criteria to a particular queue or redirect the traffic to a particular port. A default deny all
rule is the last rule of every list.
2. Apply the access list to an interface in the inbound direction.
The GS716T and GS724T Smart Switches allow ACLs to be bound to physical ports and
LAGs.The switch software supports MAC ACLs and IP ACLs.
MAC ACL Example Configuration
The following example shows how to create a MAC-based ACL that permits Ethernet traffic
from the Sales department on specified ports and denies all other traffic on those ports.
1. From the MAC ACL screen, create an ACL with the name Sales_ACL for the Sales
department of your network (See MAC ACL on page 184).
By default, this ACL will be bound on the inbound direction, which means the switch will
examine traffic as it enters the port.
2. From the MAC Rules screen, create a rule for the Sales_ACL with the following settings:
• ID: 1
• Action: Permit
• Assign Queue: 0
• Match Every: False
• CoS: 0
• Destination MAC: 01:02:1A:BC:DE:EF
Appendix B: Configuration Examples | 253
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Destination MAC Mask: 00:00:00:00:FF:FF
• Source MAC: 02:02:1A:BC:DE:EF
• Source MAC Mask: 00:00:00:00:FF:FF
• VLAN ID: 2
For more information about MAC ACL rules, see MAC Rules on page 186.
3. From the MAC Binding Configuration screen, assign the Sales_ACL to Ethernet ports 6, 7,
and 8, and then click Apply (See MAC Binding Configuration on page 188).
You can assign an optional sequence number to indicate the order of this access list
relative to other access lists if any are already assigned to this interface and direction.
4. The MAC Binding Table displays the interface and MAC ACL binding information (See MAC
Binding Table on page 189).
The ACL named Sales_ACL looks for Ethernet frames with destination and source MAC
addresses and MAC masks defined in the rule. Also, the frame must be tagged with VLAN ID
2, which is the Sales department VLAN. The CoS value of the frame must be 0, which is the
default value for Ethernet frames. Frames that match this criteria are permitted on interfaces
6, 7, and 8 and are assigned to the hardware egress queue 0, which is the default queue. All
other traffic is explicitly denied on these interfaces. To allow additional traffic to enter these
ports, you must add a new permit rule with the desired match criteria and bind the rule to
interfaces 6, 7, and 8.
Standard IP ACL Example Configuration
The following example shows how to create an IP-based ACL that prevents any IP traffic
from the Finance department from being allowed on the ports that are associated with other
254 | Appendix B: Configuration Examples
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
departments. Traffic from the Finance department is identified by each packet’s network IP
address.
1. From the IP ACL screen, create a new IP ACL with an IP ACL ID of 1 (See IP ACL on
page 190).
2. From the IP Rules screen, create a rule for IP ACL 1 with the following settings:
• Rule ID: 1
• Action: Deny
• Assign Queue ID: 0 (optional: 0 is the default value)
• Match Every: False
• Source IP Address: 192.168.187.0
• Source IP Mask: 255.255.255.0
For additional information about IP ACL rules, see IP Rules on page 191.
3. Click Add.
4. From the IP Rules screen, create a second rule for IP ACL 1 with the following settings:
• Rule ID: 2
• Action: Permit
• Match Every: True
5. Click Add.
6. From the IP Binding Configuration page, assign ACL ID 1 to the interface gigabit ports 2, 3,
and 4, and assign a sequence number of 1 (See IP Binding Configuration on page 196).
By default, this IP ACL is bound on the inbound direction, so it examines traffic as it
enters the switch.
7. Click Apply.
8. Use the IP Binding Table screen to view the interfaces and IP ACL binding information (See
IP Binding Table on page 198).
The IP ACL in this example matches all packets with the source IP address and subnet mask
of the Finance department's network and deny it on the Ethernet interfaces 2, 3, and 4 of the
switch. The second rule permits all non-Finance traffic on the ports. The second rule is
required because there is an explicit deny all rule as the lowest priority rule.
Appendix B: Configuration Examples | 255
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
Standard IP-based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service. Best
effort service implies that the network deliver the data in a timely fashion, although there is no
guarantee that it will. During times of congestion, packets may be delayed, sent sporadically,
or dropped. For typical Internet applications, such as e-mail and file transfer, a slight
degradation in service is acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable. However, any
degradation of service has undesirable effects on applications with strict timing requirements,
such as voice or multimedia.
Quality of Service (QoS) can provide consistent, predictable data delivery by distinguishing
between packets that have strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of
delay. Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS-capable
network. With this in mind, all elements of the network must be QoS-capable. If one node is
unable to meet the necessary timing requirements, this creates a deficiency in the network
path and the performance of the entire packet flow is compromised.
There are two basic types of QoS:
• Integrated Services: network resources are apportioned based on request and are
reserved (resource reservation) according to network management policy (RSVP, for
example).
• Differentiated Services: network resources are apportioned based on traffic classification
and priority, giving preferential treatment to data with strict timing requirements.
switch switches support DiffServ.
The DiffServ feature contains a number of conceptual QoS building blocks you can use to
construct a differentiated service network. Use these same blocks in different ways to build
other types of QoS architectures.
There are 3 key QoS building blocks needed to configure DiffServ:
• Class
• Policy
• Service (i.e., the assignment of a policy to a directional interface)
Class
You can classify incoming packets at layers 2, 3 and 4 by inspecting the following information
for a packet:
• Source/destination MAC address
• EtherType
• Class of Service (802.1p priority) value (first/only VLAN tag)
• VLAN ID range (first/only VLAN tag)
• Secondary 802.1p priority value (second/inner VLAN tag)
• Secondary VLAN ID range (second/inner VLAN tag)
256 | Appendix B: Configuration Examples
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• IP Service Type octet (also known as: ToS bits, Precedence value, DSCP value)
• Layer 4 protocol (TCP, UDP etc.)
• Layer 4 source/destination ports
• Source/destination IP address
From a DiffServ point of view, there are two types of classes:
• DiffServ traffic classes
• DiffServ service levels/forwarding classes
DiffServ Traffic Classes
With DiffServ, you define which traffic classes to track on an ingress interface. You can define
simple BA classifiers (DSCP) and a wide variety of multi-field (MF) classifiers:
• Layer 2; Layers 3, 4 (IP only)
• Protocol-based
• Address-based
You can combine these classifiers with logical AND or OR operations to build complex
MF-classifiers (by specifying a class type of all or any, respectively). That is, within a single
class, multiple match criteria are grouped together as an AND expression or a sequential OR
expression, depending on the defined class type. Only classes of the same type can be
nested; class nesting does not allow for the negation (i.e., exclude option) of the referenced
class.
To configure DiffServ, you must define service levels, namely the forwarding classes/PHBs
identified by a given DSCP value, on the egress interface. These service levels are defined
by configuring BA classes for each.
Creating Policies
Use DiffServ policies to associate a collection of classes that you configure with one or more
QoS policy statements. The result of this association is referred to as a policy.
From a DiffServ perspective, there are two types of policies:
• Traffic Conditioning Policy: a policy applied to a DiffServ traffic class
• Service Provisioning Policy: a policy applied to a DiffServ service level
You must manually configure the various statements and rules used in the traffic conditioning
and service provisioning policies to achieve the desired Traffic Conditioning Specification
(TCS) and the Service Level Specification (SLS) operation, respectively.
Traffic Conditioning Policy
Traffic conditioning pertains to actions performed on incoming traffic. There are several
distinct QoS actions associated with traffic conditioning:
Appendix B: Configuration Examples | 257
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
• Dropping: drop a packet upon arrival. This is useful for emulating access control list
operation using DiffServ, especially when DiffServ and ACL cannot co-exist on the same
interface.
• Marking IP DSCP or IP Precedence: marking/re-marking the DiffServ code point in a
packet with the DSCP value representing the service level associated with a particular
DiffServ traffic class. Alternatively, the IP Precedence value of the packet can be
marked/re-marked.
• Marking CoS (802.1p): sets the three-bit priority field in the first/only 802.1p header to a
specified value when packets are transmitted for the traffic class. An 802.1p header is
inserted if it does not already exist. This is useful for assigning a layer 2 priority level
based on a DiffServ forwarding class (i.e., DSCP or IP Precedence value) definition to
convey some QoS characteristics to downstream switches which do not routinely look at
the DSCP value in the IP header.
• Policing: a method of constraining incoming traffic associated with a particular class so
that it conforms to the terms of the TCS. Special treatment can be applied to out-of-profile
packets that are either in excess of the conformance specification or are non-conformant.
The DiffServ feature supports the following types of traffic policing treatments (actions):
• drop: the packet is dropped
• mark cos: the 802.1p user priority bits are (re)marked and forwarded
• mark dscp: the packet DSCP is (re)marked and forwarded
• mark prec: the packet IP Precedence is (re)marked and forwarded
• send: the packet is forwarded without DiffServ modification
Color Mode Awareness: Policing in the DiffServ feature uses either color blind or color
aware mode. Color blind mode ignores the coloration (marking) of the incoming packet.
Color aware mode takes into consideration the current packet marking when determining
the policing outcome. An auxiliary traffic class is used in conjunction with the policing
definition to specify a value for one of the 802.1p, Secondary 802.1p, IP DSCP, or IP
Precedence fields designating the incoming color value to be used as the conforming
color. The color of exceeding traffic may be optionally specified as well.
• Counting: updating octet and packet statistics to keep track of data handling along traffic
paths within DiffServ. In this DiffServ feature, counters are not explicitly configured by the
user, but are designed into the system based on the DiffServ policy being created. See
the Statistics section of this document for more details.
• Assigning QoS Queue: directs traffic stream to the specified QoS queue. This allows a
traffic classifier to specify which one of the supported hardware queues are used for
handling packets belonging to the class.
• Redirecting: forces classified traffic stream to a specified egress port (physical or LAG).
This can occur in addition to any marking or policing action. It may also be specified along
with a QoS queue assignment.
258 | Appendix B: Configuration Examples
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
DiffServ Example Configuration
To create a DiffServ Class/Policy and attach it to a switch interface, follow these steps:
1. From the QoS Class Configuration screen, create a new class with the following
settings:
• Class Name: Class1
• Class Type: All
For more information about this screen, see Class Configuration on page 137.
2. Click the Class1 hyperlink to view the DiffServ Class Configuration screen for this class.
3. Configure the following settings for Class1:
• Protocol Type: UDP
• Source IP Address: 192.12.1.0
• Source Mask: 255.255.255.0
• Source L4 Port: Other, and enter 4567 as the source port value
• Destination IP Address: 192.12.2.0
• Destination Mask: 255.255.255.0
• Destination L4 Port: Other, and enter 4568 as the destination port value
For more information about this screen, see Class Configuration on page 137.
4. Click Apply.
5. From the Policy Configuration screen, create a new policy with the following settings:
• Policy Selector: Policy1
• Member Class: Class1
For more information about this screen, see Policy Configuration on page 140.
6. Click Add to add the new policy.
7. Click the Policy1 hyperlink to view the Policy Class Configuration screen for this policy.
8. Configure the Policy attributes as follows:
• Assign Queue: 3
• Policy Attribute: Simple Policy
• Color Mode: Color Blind
• Committed Rate: 1000000 Kbps
• Committed Burst Size: 128 KB
• Confirm Action: Send
• Violate Action: Drop
For more information about this screen, see Policy Configuration on page 140.
9. From the Service Configuration screen, select the check box next to interfaces g7 and g8 to
attach the policy to these interfaces, and then click Apply (See Service Configuration on
page 145).
Appendix B: Configuration Examples | 259
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
All UDP packet flows destined to the 192.12.2.0 network with an IP source address from the
192.12.1.0 network that have a Layer 4 Source port of 4567 and Destination port of 4568
from this switch on ports 7 and 8 are assigned to hardware queue 3.
On this network, traffic from streaming applications uses UDP port 4567 as the source and
4568 as the destination. This real-time traffic is time sensitive, so it is assigned to a
high-priority hardware queue. By default, data traffic uses hardware queue 0, which is
designated as a best-effort queue.
Also the confirmed action on this flow is to send the packets with a committed rate of
1000000 Kbps and burst size of 128 KB. Packets that violate the committed rate and burst
size are dropped.
260 | Appendix B: Configuration Examples
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
802.1X
Local Area Networks (LANs) are often deployed in environments that permit unauthorized
devices to be physically attached to the LAN infrastructure, or permit unauthorized users to
attempt to access the LAN through equipment already attached. In such environments, it may
be desirable to restrict access to the services offered by the LAN to those users and devices
that are permitted to use those services.
Port-based network access control makes use of the physical characteristics of LAN
infrastructures in order to provide a means of authenticating and authorizing devices attached
to a LAN port that has point-to-point connection characteristics and of preventing access to
that port in cases in which the authentication and authorization process fails. In this context, a
port is a single point of attachment to the LAN, such as ports of MAC bridges and
associations between stations or access points in IEEE 802.11 Wireless LANs.
The IEEE 802.11 standard describes an architectural framework within which authentication
and consequent actions take place. It also establishes the requirements for a protocol
between the authenticator (the system that passes an authentication request to the
authentication server) and the supplicant (the system that requests authentication), as well as
between the authenticator and the authentication server.
The switch switch supports a guest VLAN, which allows unauthenticated users to have
limited access to the network resources.
Note: You can use QoS features to provide rate limiting on the guest VLAN
to limit the network resources the guest VLAN provides.
Another 802.1X feature is the ability to configure a port to Enable/Disable EAPoL packet
forwarding support.You can disable or enable the forwarding of EAPoL when 802.1X is
disabled on the device.
The ports of an 802.1X authenticator switch provide the means in which it can offer services
to other systems reachable via the LAN. Port-based network access control allows the
operation of a switch’s ports to be controlled in order to ensure that access to its services is
only permitted by systems that are authorized to do so.
Port access control provides a means of preventing unauthorized access by supplicants to
the services offered by a system. Control over the access to a switch and the LAN to which it
is connected can be desirable in order to restrict access to publicly accessible bridge ports or
to restrict access to departmental LANs.
Access control is achieved by enforcing authentication of supplicants that are attached to an
authenticator's controlled ports. The result of the authentication process determines whether
the supplicant is authorized to access services on that controlled port.
Appendix B: Configuration Examples | 261
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
A Port Access Entity (PAE) is able to adopt one of two distinct roles within an access control
interaction:
1. Authenticator: A Port that enforces authentication before allowing access to services
available via that Port.
2. Supplicant: A Port that attempts to access services offered by the Authenticator.
Additionally, there exists a third role:
3. Authentication server: Performs the authentication function necessary to check the
credentials of the Supplicant on behalf of the Authenticator.
All three roles are required in order to complete an authentication exchange.
switch switches support the Authenticator role only, in which the PAE is responsible for
communicating with the Supplicant. The Authenticator PAE is also responsible for submitting
the information received from the Supplicant to the Authentication Server in order for the
credentials to be checked, which will determine the authorization state of the Port. The
Authenticator PAE controls the authorized/unauthorized state of the controlled Port
depending on the outcome of the RADIUS-based authentication process.
802.1X Example Configuration
This example shows how to configure the switch so that 802.1X-based authentication is
required on the ports in a corporate conference room (e1–e8). These ports are available to
visitors and need to be authenticated before granting access to the network. The
authentication is handled by an external RADIUS server. When the visitor is successfully
authenticated, traffic is automatically assigned to the guest VLAN. This example assumes
that a VLAN has been configured with a VLAN ID of 150 and VLAN Name of Guest.
1. From the Port Authentication screen, select ports e1 through e8.
2. From the Port Control menu, select Unauthorized.
The Port Control setting for all other ports where authentication is not needed should
Authorized. When the Port Control setting is Authorized, the port is unconditionally put in
a force-Authorized state and does not require any authentication. When the Port Control
setting is Auto, the authenticator PAE sets the controlled port mode
Supplicant
Supplicant
Authenticator
Switch Authentication
Server (RADIUS)
192.168.10.23
262 | Appendix B: Configuration Examples
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
3. In the Guest VLAN field for ports e1–e8, enter 150 to assign these ports to the guest VLAN.
You can configure additional settings to control access to the network through the ports.
See Port Security Interface Configuration on page 179 for information about the settings.
4. Click Apply.
5. From the 802.1X Configuration screen, set the Port Based Authentication State and Guest
VLAN Mode to Enable, and then click Apply (See Port Security Configuration on
page 178).
This example uses the default values for the port authentication settings, but there are
several additional settings that you can configure. For example, the EAPOL Flood Mode
field allows you to enable the forwarding of EAPoL frames when 802.1X is disabled on
the device.
6. From the RADIUS Server Configuration screen, configure a RADIUS server with the
following settings:
• Server Address: 192.168.10.23
• Secret Configured: Yes
• Secret: secret123
• Active: Primary
For more information, see RADIUS Configuration on page 151.
7. Click Add.
8. From the Authentication List screen, configure the default List to use RADIUS as the first
authentication method (See Authentication List Configuration on page 159).
This example enables 802.1X-based port security on the GS716T or GS724T switch and
prompts the hosts connected on ports e1–e8 for an 802.1X-based authentication. The switch
passes the authentication information to the configured RADIUS server.
Appendix B: Configuration Examples | 263
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
MSTP
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) runs on bridged networks to help eliminate loops. If a bridge
loop occurs, the network can become flooded with traffic. IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol (MSTP) supports multiple instances of Spanning Tree to efficiently channel
VLAN traffic over different interfaces. Each instance of the Spanning Tree behaves in the
manner specified in IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree, with slight modifications in the
working but not the end effect (chief among the effects is the rapid transitioning of the port to
the Forwarding state).
The difference between the RSTP and the traditional STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to
configure and recognize full duplex connectivity and ports that are connected to end stations,
resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to the Forwarding state and the suppression of
Topology Change Notification. These features are represented by the parameters
pointtopoint and edgeport. MSTP is compatible to both RSTP and STP. It behaves
appropriately to STP and RSTP bridges.
A MSTP bridge can be configured to behave entirely as a RSTP bridge or a STP bridge. So,
an IEEE 802.1s bridge inherently also supports IEEE 802.1w and IEEE 802.1D.
The MSTP algorithm and protocol provides simple and full connectivity for frames assigned
to any given VLAN throughout a Bridged LAN comprising arbitrarily interconnected
networking devices, each operating MSTP, STP or RSTP. MSTP allows frames assigned to
different VLANs to follow separate paths, each based on an independent Multiple Spanning
Tree Instance (MSTI), within Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) Regions composed of LANs and
or MSTP Bridges. These Regions and the other Bridges and LANs are connected into a
single Common Spanning Tree (CST). [IEEE DRAFT P802.1s/D13]
MSTP connects all Bridges and LANs with a single Common and Internal Spanning Tree
(CIST). The CIST supports the automatic determination of each MST region, choosing its
maximum possible extent. The connectivity calculated for the CIST provides the CST for
interconnecting these Regions, and an Internal Spanning Tree (IST) within each Region.
MSTP ensures that frames with a given VLAN ID are assigned to one and only one of the
MSTIs or the IST within the Region, that the assignment is consistent among all the
networking devices in the Region and that the stable connectivity of each MSTI and IST at
the boundary of the Region matches that of the CST. The stable active topology of the
Bridged LAN with respect to frames consistently classified as belonging to any given VLAN
thus simply and fully connects all LANs and networking devices throughout the network,
though frames belonging to different VLANs can take different paths within any Region, per
IEEE DRAFT P802.1s/D13.
All bridges, whether they use STP, RSTP or MSTP, send information in configuration
messages via Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) to assign port roles that determine each
port’s participation in a fully and simply connected active topology based on one or more
spanning trees. The information communicated is known as the spanning tree priority vector.
The BPDU structure for each of these different protocols is different. A MSTP bridge will
transmit the appropriate BPDU depending on the received type of BPDU from a particular
port.
264 | Appendix B: Configuration Examples
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
An MST Region comprises of one or more MSTP Bridges with the same MST Configuration
Identifier, using the same MSTIs, and which have no Bridges attached that cannot receive
and transmit MSTP BPDUs. The MST Configuration Identifier has the following components:
1. Configuration Identifier Format Selector
2. Configuration Name
3. Configuration Revision Level
4. Configuration Digest: 16-byte signature of type HMAC-MD5 created from the MST
Configuration Table (a VLAN ID to MSTID mapping)
As there are Multiple Instances of Spanning Tree, there is a MSTP state maintained on a
per-port, per-instance basis (or on a per port per VLAN basis: as any VLAN can be in one and
only one MSTI or CIST). For example, port A can be forwarding for instance 1 while
discarding for instance 2. The port states have changed since IEEE 802.1D specification.
To support multiple spanning trees, a MSTP bridge has to be configured with an
unambiguous assignment of VLAN IDs (VIDs) to spanning trees. This is achieved by:
1. Ensuring that the allocation of VIDs to FIDs is unambiguous.
2. Ensuring that each FID supported by the Bridge is allocated to exactly one Spanning Tree
Instance.
The combination of VID to FID and then FID to MSTI allocation defines a mapping of VIDs to
spanning tree instances, represented by the MST Configuration Table.
With this allocation we ensure that every VLAN is assigned to one and only one MSTI. The
CIST is also an instance of spanning tree with a MSTID of 0.
An instance may occur that has no VIDs allocated to it, but every VLAN must be allocated to
one of the other instances of spanning tree.
The portion of the active topology of the network that connects any two bridges in the same
MST Region traverses only MST bridges and LANs in that region, and never Bridges of any
kind outside the Region, in other words connectivity within the region is independent of
external connectivity.
MSTP Example Configuration
This example shows how to create an MSTP instance from the GS716T or GS724T switch.
The example network has three different GS716T or GS724T switches that serve different
locations in the network. In this example, ports e1–e5 are connected to host stations, so
those links are not subject to network loops. Ports e6–e8 are connected across switches 1, 2,
and 3.
Appendix B: Configuration Examples | 265
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Perform the following procedures on each switch to configure MSTP:
1. Use the VLAN Configuration screen to create VLANs 300 and 500 (see VLAN
Configuration on page 80).
2. Use the VLAN Membership screen to include ports g1–g8 as tagged (T) or untagged (U)
members of VLAN 300 and VLAN 500 (see VLAN Membership Configuration on page 81).
3. From the STP Configuration screen, enable the Spanning Tree State option (see STP
Switch Configuration on page 93).
Use the default values for the rest of the STP configuration settings. By default, the STP
Operation Mode is MSTP and the Configuration Name is the switch MAC address.
4. From the CST Configuration screen, set the Bridge Priority value for each of the three
switches to force Switch 1 to be the root bridge:
• Switch 1: 4096
• Switch 2: 12288
• Switch 3: 20480
Note: Bridge priority values are multiples of 4096.
If you do not specify a root bridge and all switches have the same Bridge Priority value,
the switch with the lowest MAC address is elected as the root bridge (see CST
Configuration on page 95).
5. From the CST Port Configuration screen, select ports g1–g8 and select Enable from the
STP Status menu (see CST Port Configuration on page 97).
6. Click Apply.
7. Select ports g1–g5 (edge ports), and select Enable from the Fast Link menu.
Ports e1-e5
Switch 1
Connected to Hosts
Root Bridge
Switch 2
Switch 3
Ports e1-e5
Connected to Hosts
Ports e1-e5
Connected to Hosts
Ports e6-e8
Connected to Switch 2 and 3
Ports e6-e8
Connected to Switch 1 and 2
266 | Appendix B: Configuration Examples
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Since the edge ports are not at risk for network loops, ports with Fast Link enabled
transition directly to the Forwarding state.
8. Click Apply.
You can use the CST Port Status screen to view spanning tree information about each
port.
9. From the MST Configuration screen, create a MST instances with the following settings:
• MST ID: 1
• Priority: Use the default (32768)
• VLAN ID: 300
For more information, see MST Configuration on page 103.
10. Click Add.
11. Create a second MST instance with the following settings
• MST ID: 2
• Priority: 49152
• VLAN ID: 500
12. Click Add.
In this example, assume that Switch 1 has become the Root bridge for the MST instance 1,
and Switch 2 has become the Root bridge for MST instance 2. Switch 3 has hosts in the
Sales department (ports e1, e2, and e3) and in the HR department (ports e4 and e5).
Switches 1 and 2 also have hosts in the Sales and Human Resources departments. The
hosts connected from Switch 2 use VLAN 500, MST instance 2 to communicate with the
hosts on Switch 3 directly. Likewise, hosts of Switch 1 use VLAN 300, MST instance 1 to
communicate with the hosts on Switch 3 directly.
The hosts use different instances of MSTP to effectively use the links across the switch. The
same concept can be extended to other switches and more instances of MSTP.
Appendix B: Configuration Examples | 267
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Appendix C: Notification of Compliance | 268
C. Notification of Compliance
NETGEAR Wired Products C
Certificate of the Manufacturer/Importer
It is hereby certified that the ProSafe™ GS716T and 724T Gigabit Smart Switches has been suppressed
in accordance with the conditions set out in the BMPT-AmtsblVfg 243/1991 and Vfg 46/1992. The operation of some
equipment (for example, test transmitters) in accordance with the regulations may, however, be subject to certain
restrictions. Please refer to the notes in the operating instructions.
The Federal Office for Telecommunications Approvals has been notified of the placing of this equipment on the market
and has been granted the right to test the series for compliance with the regulations.
Bestätigung des Herstellers/Importeurs
Es wird hiermit bestätigt, daß das ProSafe™ GS716T and 724T Gigabit Smart Switches gemäß der im
BMPT-AmtsblVfg 243/1991 und Vfg 46/1992 aufgeführten Bestimmungen entstört ist. Das vorschriftsmäßige
Betreiben einiger Geräte (z.B. Testsender) kann jedoch gewissen Beschränkungen unterliegen. Lesen Sie dazu bitte
die Anmerkungen in der Betriebsanleitung.
Das Bundesamt für Zulassungen in der Telekommunikation wurde davon unterrichtet, daß dieses Gerät auf den Markt
gebracht wurde und es ist berechtigt, die Serie auf die Erfüllung der Vorschriften hin zu überprüfen.
Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Statement
This equipment is in the Class B category (information equipment to be used in a residential area or an adjacent area
thereto) and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Data Processing
Equipment and Electronic Office Machines aimed at preventing radio interference in such residential areas. When
used near a radio or TV receiver, it may become the cause of radio interference. Read instructions for correct handling.
FCC Caution
• Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.
• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Regulatory Compliance Information
This section includes user requirements for operating this product in accordance with National laws for usage of radio
spectrum and operation of radio devices. Failure of the end-user to comply with the applicable requirements may result
in unlawful operation and adverse action against the end-user by the applicable National regulatory authority.
Note: This product’s firmware limits operation to only the channels allowed in a particular Region or Country.
Therefore, all options described in this user's guide may not be available in your version of the product.
Appendix C: Notification of Compliance | 269
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
Europe – EU Declaration of Conformity
Marking by the above symbol indicates compliance with the Essential Requirements of the R&TTE Directive of the
European Union (1999/5/EC). This equipment meets the following conformance standards:
EN300 328, EN301 489-17, EN60950
For complete DoC please visit the NETGEAR EU Declarations of Conformity website at:
http://kb.netgear.com/app/answers/detail/a_id/11621/
EDOC in Languages of the European Community
Cesky [Czech] NETGEAR Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento Radiolan je ve shode se základními
požadavky a dalšími príslušnými ustanoveními smernice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk
[Danish]
Undertegnede NETGEAR Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Radiolan
overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch
[German]
Hiermit erklärt NETGEAR Inc., dass sich das Gerät Radiolan in Übereinstimmung
mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen
Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Eesti
[Estonian]
Käesolevaga kinnitab NETGEAR Inc. seadme Radiolan vastavust direktiivi
1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele
asjakohastele sätetele.
English Hereby, NETGEAR Inc., declares that this Radiolan is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español
[Spanish]
Por medio de la presente NETGEAR Inc. declara que el Radiolan cumple con los
requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de
la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Ελληνική
[Greek]
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ NETGEAR Inc. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ Radiolan ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ
ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
Français
[French]
Par la présente NETGEAR Inc. déclare que l'appareil Radiolan est conforme aux
exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive
1999/5/CE.
Italiano [Italian] Con la presente NETGEAR Inc. dichiara che questo Radiolan è conforme ai
requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva
1999/5/CE.
Latviski
[Latvian]
Ar šo NETGEAR Inc. deklarē, ka Radiolan atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių
[Lithuanian]
Šiuo NETGEAR Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis Radiolan atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir
kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Nederlands
[Dutch]
Hierbij verklaart NETGEAR Inc. dat het toestel Radiolan in overeenstemming is
met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn
1999/5/EG.
270 | Appendix C: Notification of Compliance
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States
FCC Information to User
This product does not contain any user serviceable components and is to be used with approved antennas only.
Any product changes or modifications will invalidate all applicable regulatory certifications and approvals
FCC Guidelines for Human Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This
equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
FCC Declaration Of Conformity
We, NETGEAR, Inc., 350 East Plumeria Drive, Santa Clara, CA 95134, declare under our sole responsibility that
the ProSafe™ GS716T and 724T Gigabit Smart Switches complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Malti [Maltese] Hawnhekk, NETGEAR Inc., jiddikjara li dan Radiolan jikkonforma mal-htigijiet
essenzjali u ma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Magyar
[Hungarian]
Alulírott, NETGEAR Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Radiolan megfelel a vonatkozó
alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Polski [Polish] Niniejszym NETGEAR Inc. oświadcza, że Radiolan jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português
[Portuguese]
NETGEAR Inc. declara que este Radiolan está conforme com os requisitos
essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko
[Slovenian]
NETGEAR Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Radiolan v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in
ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovensky
[Slovak]
NETGEAR Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že Radiolan spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi
[Finnish]
NETGEAR Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Radiolan tyyppinen laite on direktiivin
1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen
mukainen.
Svenska
[Swedish]
Härmed intygar NETGEAR Inc. att denna Radiolan står I överensstämmelse med
de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av
direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Íslenska
[Icelandic]
Hér með lýsir NETGEAR Inc. yfir því að Radiolan er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og
aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Norsk
[Norwegian]
NETGEAR Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Radiolan er i samsvar med de
grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
EDOC in Languages of the European Community
Appendix C: Notification of Compliance | 271
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Warnings & Instructions
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following methods:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an electrical outlet on a circuit different from that which the radio receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Modifications made to the product, unless expressly approved by NETGEAR, Inc., could void the user's right to
operate the equipment.
Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus, (ProSafe™ GS716T and 724T Gigabit Smart Switches), does not exceed the Class B limits for
radio-noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian
Department of Communications.
Canada ID: 4054A-FVX538
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
Tested to Comply
with FCC Standards
PY306100037
ProSafe™ GS716T and 724T Gigabit Smart Switches
Index | 272
Index
Numerics
802.1X 151, 168
example configuration 260
A
access control
ACL example configuration 252
ACLs 183
management interface 161
authentication
802.1X 168, 260
enable 28
list 159
port-based 168
RADIUS 151, 153
SNMP 28, 50, 51
TACACS+ 156
Auto-Video 109
C
certificate 163
changing the password 19, 150
Configuration
802.1X 168
Access Control Lists 183
Access Profile 165
Access Rule 166
Authentication List 159
Class 137
Community 48
CoS 128
DHCP Filtering 65
Differentiated Services 135
Diffserv 136
DNS 43
Dual Image 234
Dynamic Address 124
Dynamic Host 45
Global 110
Green Ethernet 46
HTTP 161
IGMP Snooping 110
LACP 77
LACP Port 78
LAG 75
LLDP 52
MAC Filter 175
Management Access 161
MST Port 104
Network Settings on the Administrative System 16
password 150
Policy 140
Port Security 178
Port VLAN ID 83
RADIUS 151
Global 151
Secure HTTP 162
SNMP v3 User 51
SNTP Server 39
Standard IP ACL Example 253
STP 93
TACACS+ 156
Time 36
Trap 49
VLAN 80
VLAN example 251
VLAN Port Membership 81
CoS 128
D
defaults 244
CoS 253
factory 151
DES 28
Device View 26
DHCP
client 12
Filtering 65
Filtering Interface Configuration 66
refreshing the client 19
DiffServ 135
DNS 43
DoS 41
download
a file 230
files via HTTP 230
from a remote system 230
software 230
Dual Image Status 235
Index | 273
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
E
EAP 211
EAPOL 212
F
file management 234
firmware 21
firmware download 230
G
getting started 10
Green Ethernet 46, 72
guest VLAN configuration 261
H
help, HTML-based 26
HTTP 161
management interface access 18
secure 161
using to download files 232
HTTPS 162
I
ICMP 41
IEEE 802.11x 260
IEEE 802.1AB 52
IEEE 802.1D 93
IEEE 802.1Q 80, 93
IEEE 802.1s 93
IEEE 802.1w 93
IEEE 802.1X 151
IEEE 802.3 flow control 73
IGMP 110
interface
LAG 74
logical 29
naming convention 29
physical 29
queue configuration 131
IP address
administrative system 16
static configuration 19
switch 12, 33
IP DSCP 128
Mapping 133
L
LACP port configuration 78
LAG VLAN 74
LAGPDUs 74
LAGs 74
Membership 76
Static 74
LLDP 52
Local Information 57
neighbors information 60
packets 53
port settings 53
LLDP-MED 52
M
MAC 33, 59, 101, 110
ACL 184
bridge identifier 104
CPU Management Interface 29
dynamic address 124
filter summary 176
MFDB Table 115
multicast destination 115
rules 186
searching address table 122
Static Address 125
MD5 36
MIBs 28
N
navigation 25
O
OUI 88
P
password
change 19, 150
login 150
Ping 237
port
authentication 168
summary 173
Q
QoS 127
802.1p to Queue Mapping 132
274 | Index
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual
R
RADIUS 150
server 151
statistics 153
reboot 19, 226
reset
button 151
configuration to defaults 226
switch 226
RSTP 93
S
Security MAC Address 181
server, HTTP 161
severity, log message 216
Simple Network Time Protocol 35
SNMP
traps 49
using 28
v1, v2 47
v3 51
SNTP 35
Global Status 38
global status 38
server configuration 39
server status 40
specifications 244
SSL 162
storm control 177
STP 93
example configuration 263
Status 93
Stratum
0 35
1 35
2 35
T
T1 36
T2 36
T3 36
T4 36
TACACS+
folder 157
settings 157
technical support 2
Time
configure through SNTP 37
UTC 38
time 35
clock source 37
levels 35
local 37
zone 37
TraceRoute 238
trademarks 2
traffic control 174
trap
flags 50
manager 50
U
Unicast 36
upload configuration 228
V
VLAN 80
example configuration 250
guest 169, 171, 260
ID 80
management 34
managing 80
Port VLAN ID 83
PVID 83
voice 86
Voice VLAN OUI 88
VoIP 90, 92
W
Web interface panel 24
Index | 275
GS716Tv2 and GS724Tv3 Software Administration Manual

Navigation menu